1gm(1) General Commands Manual gm(1)
2
3
4
5 NAME
6
7 gm - command-line utility to create, edit, compare, convert, or
8 display images
9
10
12 gm animate [ options ... ] file [ [ options ... ] file ... ]
13
14 gm batch [ options ... ] [ script ]
15
16 gm benchmark [ options ... ] subcommand
17
18 gm compare [ options ... ] reference-image [ options ... ] compare-
19 image [ options ... ]
20
21 gm composite [ options ... ] change-image base-image [ mask-image ]
22 output-image
23
24 gm conjure [ options ] script.msl [ [ options ] script.msl ]
25
26 gm convert [ [ options ... ] [ input-file ... ] [ options ... ] ] out‐
27 put-file
28
29 gm display [ options ... ] file ... [ [options ... ]file ... ]
30
31 gm identify file [ file ... ]
32
33 gm import [ options ... ] file
34
35 gm mogrify [ options ... ] file ...
36
37 gm montage [ options ... ] file [ [ options ... ] file ... ] output-
38 file
39
40 gm time subcommand
41
42 gm version
43
45 GraphicsMagick's gm provides a suite of utilities for creating, compar‐
46 ing, converting, editing, and displaying images. All of the utilities
47 are provided as sub-commands of a single gm executable. The gm exe‐
48 cutable returns the exit code 0 to indicate success, or 1 to indicate
49 failure:
50
51 animate displays an animation (e.g. a GIF file) on any workstation dis‐
52 play running an X server.
53
54 batch executes an arbitary number of the utility commands (e.g. con‐
55 vert) in the form of a simple linear batch script in order to improve
56 execution efficiency, and/or to allow use as a subordinate co-process
57 under the control of an arbitrary script or program.
58
59 benchmark executes one of the other utility commands (e.g. convert) for
60 a specified number of iterations, or execution time, and reports execu‐
61 tion time and other profiling information such as CPU utilization.
62 Benchmark provides various operating modes including executing the com‐
63 mand with a varying number of threads, and alternate reporting formats
64 such as comma-separated value (CSV).
65
66 compare compares two images and reports difference statistics according
67 to specified metrics and/or outputs an image with a visual representa‐
68 tion of the differences. It may also be used to test if images are
69 similar within a particular range and specified metric, returning a
70 truth value to the executing environment.
71
72 composite composites images (blends or merges images together) to cre‐
73 ate new images.
74
75 conjure interprets and executes scripts in the Magick Scripting Lan‐
76 guage (MSL).
77
78 convert converts an input file using one image format to an output file
79 with the same or differing image format while applying an arbitrary
80 number of image transformations.
81
82 display is a machine architecture independent image processing and dis‐
83 play facility. It can display an image on any workstation display run‐
84 ning an X server.
85
86 identify describes the format and characteristics of one or more image
87 files. It will also report if an image is incomplete or corrupt.
88
89 import reads an image from any visible window on an X server and out‐
90 puts it as an image file. You can capture a single window, the entire
91 screen, or any rectangular portion of the screen.
92
93 mogrify transforms an image or a sequence of images. These transforms
94 include image scaling, image rotation, color reduction, and others. The
95 transmogrified image overwrites the original image.
96
97 montage creates a composite by combining several separate images. The
98 images are tiled on the composite image with the name of the image
99 optionally appearing just below the individual tile.
100
101 time executes a subcommand and reports the user, system, and total exe‐
102 cution time consumed.
103
104 version reports the GraphicsMagick release version, maximum sample-
105 depth, copyright notice, supported features, and the options used while
106 building the software.
107
108 The GraphicsMagick utilities recognize the following image formats:
109
110
111 Name Mode Description
112 o 3FR r-- Hasselblad Photo RAW
113 o 8BIM rw- Photoshop resource format
114 o 8BIMTEXT rw- Photoshop resource text format
115 o 8BIMWTEXT rw- Photoshop resource wide text format
116 o APP1 rw- Raw application information
117 o APP1JPEG rw- Raw JPEG binary data
118 o ART r-- PF1: 1st Publisher
119 o ARW r-- Sony Alpha DSLR RAW
120 o AVS rw+ AVS X image
121 o BIE rw- Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
122 interchange format
123 o BMP rw+ Microsoft Windows bitmap image
124 o BMP2 -w- Microsoft Windows bitmap image v2
125 o BMP3 -w- Microsoft Windows bitmap image v3
126 o CACHE --- Magick Persistent Cache image format
127 o CALS rw- Continuous Acquisition and Life-cycle
128 Support Type 1 image
129 o CAPTION r-- Caption (requires separate size info)
130 o CIN rw- Kodak Cineon Format
131 o CMYK rw- Raw cyan, magenta, yellow, and black
132 samples (8 or 16 bits, depending on
133 the image depth)
134 o CMYKA rw- Raw cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and
135 matte samples (8 or 16 bits, depending
136 on the image depth)
137 o CR2 r-- Canon Photo RAW
138 o CRW r-- Canon Photo RAW
139 o CUR r-- Microsoft Cursor Icon
140 o CUT r-- DR Halo
141 o DCM r-- Digital Imaging and Communications in
142 Medicine image
143 o DCR r-- Kodak Photo RAW
144 o DCX rw+ ZSoft IBM PC multi-page Paintbrush
145 o DNG r-- Adobe Digital Negative
146 o DPS r-- Display PostScript Interpreter
147 o DPX rw- Digital Moving Picture Exchange
148 o EPDF rw- Encapsulated Portable Document Format
149 o EPI rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
150 Interchange format
151 o EPS rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
152 o EPS2 -w- Adobe Level II Encapsulated PostScript
153 o EPS3 -w- Adobe Level III Encapsulated PostScript
154 o EPSF rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
155 o EPSI rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
156 Interchange format
157 o EPT rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript with MS-DOS
158 TIFF preview
159 o EPT2 rw- Adobe Level II Encapsulated PostScript
160 with MS-DOS TIFF preview
161 o EPT3 rw- Adobe Level III Encapsulated PostScript
162 with MS-DOS TIFF preview
163 o EXIF rw- Exif digital camera binary data
164 o FAX rw+ Group 3 FAX (Not TIFF Group3 FAX!)
165 o FITS rw- Flexible Image Transport System
166 o FRACTAL r-- Plasma fractal image
167 o FPX rw- FlashPix Format
168 o GIF rw+ CompuServe graphics interchange format
169 o GIF87 rw- CompuServe graphics interchange format
170 (version 87a)
171 o GRADIENT r-- Gradual passing from one shade to
172 another
173 o GRAY rw+ Raw gray samples (8/16/32 bits,
174 depending on the image depth)
175 o HISTOGRAM -w- Histogram of the image
176 o HRZ r-- HRZ: Slow scan TV
177 o HTML -w- Hypertext Markup Language and a
178 client-side image map
179 o ICB rw+ Truevision Targa image
180 o ICC rw- ICC Color Profile
181 o ICM rw- ICC Color Profile
182 o ICO r-- Microsoft icon
183 o ICON r-- Microsoft icon
184 o IDENTITY r-- Hald CLUT identity image
185 o IMAGE r-- GraphicsMagick Embedded Image
186 o INFO -w+ Image descriptive information and
187 statistics
188 o IPTC rw- IPTC Newsphoto
189 o IPTCTEXT rw- IPTC Newsphoto text format
190 o IPTCWTEXT rw- IPTC Newsphoto wide text format
191 o JBG rw+ Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
192 interchange format
193 o JBIG rw+ Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
194 interchange format
195 o JNG rw- JPEG Network Graphics
196 o JP2 rw- JPEG-2000 JP2 File Format Syntax
197 o JPC rw- JPEG-2000 Code Stream Syntax
198 o JPEG rw- Joint Photographic Experts Group
199 JFIF format
200 o JPG rw- Joint Photographic Experts Group
201 JFIF format
202 o K25 r-- Kodak Photo RAW
203 o KDC r-- Kodak Photo RAW
204 o LABEL r-- Text image format
205 o M2V rw+ MPEG-2 Video Stream
206 o MAP rw- Colormap intensities and indices
207 o MAT r-- MATLAB image format
208 o MATTE -w+ MATTE format
209 o MIFF rw+ Magick Image File Format
210 o MNG rw+ Multiple-image Network Graphics
211 o MONO rw- Bi-level bitmap in least-significant-
212 -byte-first order
213 o MPC rw+ Magick Persistent Cache image format
214 o MPEG rw+ MPEG-1 Video Stream
215 o MPG rw+ MPEG-1 Video Stream
216 o MRW r-- Minolta Photo Raw
217 o MSL r-- Magick Scripting Language
218 o MTV rw+ MTV Raytracing image format
219 o MVG rw- Magick Vector Graphics
220 o NEF r-- Nikon Electronic Format
221 o NULL r-- Constant image of uniform color
222 o OTB rw- On-the-air bitmap
223 o P7 rw+ Xv thumbnail format
224 o PAL rw- 16bit/pixel interleaved YUV
225 o PALM rw- Palm Pixmap
226 o PBM rw+ Portable bitmap format (black and white)
227 o PCD rw- Photo CD
228 o PCDS rw- Photo CD
229 o PCL -w- Page Control Language
230 o PCT rw- Apple Macintosh QuickDraw/PICT
231 o PCX rw- ZSoft IBM PC Paintbrush
232 o PDB rw+ Palm Database ImageViewer Format
233 o PDF rw+ Portable Document Format
234 o PEF r-- Pentax Electronic File
235 o PFA r-- TrueType font
236 o PFB r-- TrueType font
237 o PGM rw+ Portable graymap format (gray scale)
238 o PGX r-- JPEG-2000 VM Format
239 o PICON rw- Personal Icon
240 o PICT rw- Apple Macintosh QuickDraw/PICT
241 o PIX r-- Alias/Wavefront RLE image format
242 o PLASMA r-- Plasma fractal image
243 o PNG rw- Portable Network Graphics
244 o PNG24 rw- Portable Network Graphics, 24 bit RGB
245 opaque only
246 o PNG32 rw- Portable Network Graphics, 32 bit RGBA
247 semitransparency OK
248 o PNG8 rw- Portable Network Graphics, 8-bit
249 indexed, binary transparency only
250 o PNM rw+ Portable anymap
251 o PPM rw+ Portable pixmap format (color)
252 o PREVIEW -w- Show a preview an image enhancement,
253 effect, or f/x
254 o PS rw+ Adobe PostScript
255 o PS2 -w+ Adobe Level II PostScript
256 o PS3 -w+ Adobe Level III PostScript
257 o PSD rw- Adobe Photoshop bitmap
258 o PTIF rw- Pyramid encoded TIFF
259 o PWP r-- Seattle Film Works
260 o RAF r-- Fuji Photo RAW
261 o RAS rw+ SUN Rasterfile
262 o RGB rw+ Raw red, green, and blue samples
263 o RGBA rw+ Raw red, green, blue, and matte samples
264 o RLA r-- Alias/Wavefront image
265 o RLE r-- Utah Run length encoded image
266 o SCT r-- Scitex HandShake
267 o SFW r-- Seattle Film Works
268 o SGI rw+ Irix RGB image
269 o SHTML -w- Hypertext Markup Language and a
270 client-side image map
271 o STEGANO r-- Steganographic image
272 o SUN rw+ SUN Rasterfile
273 o SVG rw+ Scalable Vector Gaphics
274 o TEXT rw+ Raw text
275 o TGA rw+ Truevision Targa image
276 o TIFF rw+ Tagged Image File Format
277 o TILE r-- Tile image with a texture
278 o TIM r-- PSX TIM
279 o TOPOL r-- TOPOL X Image
280 o TTF r-- TrueType font
281 o TXT rw+ Raw text
282 o UIL -w- X-Motif UIL table
283 o UYVY rw- 16bit/pixel interleaved YUV
284 o VDA rw+ Truevision Targa image
285 o VICAR rw- VICAR rasterfile format
286 o VID rw+ Visual Image Directory
287 o VIFF rw+ Khoros Visualization image
288 o VST rw+ Truevision Targa image
289 o WBMP rw- Wireless Bitmap (level 0) image
290 o WMF r-- Windows Metafile
291 o WPG r-- Word Perfect Graphics
292 o X rw- X Image
293 o X3F r-- Foveon X3 (Sigma/Polaroid) RAW
294 o XBM rw- X Windows system bitmap (black
295 and white)
296 o XC r-- Constant image uniform color
297 o XCF r-- GIMP image
298 o XMP rw- Adobe XML metadata
299 o XPM rw- X Windows system pixmap (color)
300 o XV rw+ Khoros Visualization image
301 o XWD rw- X Windows system window dump (color)
302 o YUV rw- CCIR 601 4:1:1 or 4:2:2 (8-bit only)
303
304 Modes:
305 r Read
306 w Write
307 + Multi-image
308
309
310 Support for some of these formats require additional programs or
311 libraries. See README in the source package for where to find optional
312 additional software.
313
314 Note, a format delineated with + means that if more than one image is
315 specified, frames are combined into a single multi-image file. Use
316 +adjoin if you want a single image produced for each frame.
317
318 Your installation might not support all of the formats in the list. To
319 get an accurate listing of the formats supported by your particular
320 configuration, run "gm convert -list format".
321
322 Raw images are expected to have one byte per pixel unless gm is com‐
323 piled in 16-bit quantum mode or in 32-bit quantum mode. Here, the raw
324 data is expected to be stored two or four bytes per pixel, respec‐
325 tively, in most-significant-byte-first order. For example, you can
326 tell if gm was compiled in 16-bit mode by typing "gm version" without
327 any options, and looking for "Q:16" in the first line of output.
328
330 By default, the image format is determined by its magic number, i.e.,
331 the first few bytes of the file. To specify a particular image format,
332 precede the filename with an image format name and a colon
333 (i.e.ps:image) or specify the image type as the filename suffix
334 (i.e.image.ps). The magic number takes precedence over the filename
335 suffix and the prefix takes precedence over the magic number and the
336 suffix in input files. When a file is read, its magic number is stored
337 in the "image->magick" string. In output files, the prefix takes
338 precedence over the filename suffix, and the filename suffix takes
339 precedence over the "image->magick" string.
340
341 To read the "built-in" formats (GRANITE, H, LOGO, NETSCAPE, PLASMA, and
342 ROSE) use a prefix (including the colon) without a filename or suffix.
343 To read the XC format, follow the colon with a color specification. To
344 read the CAPTION format, follow the colon with a text string or with a
345 filename prefixed with the at symbol (@).
346
347
348 When you specify X as your image type, the filename has special mean‐
349 ing. It specifies an X window by id, name, or root. If no filename is
350 specified, the window is selected by clicking the mouse in the desired
351 window.
352
353 Specify input_file as - for standard input, output_file as - for stan‐
354 dard output. If input_file has the extension .Z or .gz, the file is
355 uncompressed with uncompress or gunzip respectively. If output_file
356 has the extension .Z or .gz, the file is compressed using with compress
357 or gzip respectively.
358
359 Use an optional index enclosed in brackets after an input file name to
360 specify a desired subimage of a multi-resolution image format like
361 Photo CD (e.g. "img0001.pcd[4]") or a range for MPEG images (e.g.
362 "video.mpg[50-75]"). A subimage specification can be disjoint (e.g.
363 "image.tiff[2,7,4]"). For raw images, specify a subimage with a geome‐
364 try (e.g. -size 640x512 "image.rgb[320x256+50+50]"). Surround the
365 image name with quotation marks to prevent your shell from interpreting
366 the square brackets. Single images are written with the filename you
367 specify. However, multi-part images (e.g., a multi-page PostScript doc‐
368 ument with +adjoin specified) may be written with the scene number
369 included as part of the filename. In order to include the scene number
370 in the filename, it is necessary to include a printf-style %d format
371 specification in the file name and use the +adjoin option. For example,
372
373 image%02d.miff
374
375
376 writes files image00.miff, image01.miff, etc. Only a single specifica‐
377 tion is allowed within an output filename. If more than one specifica‐
378 tion is present, it will be ignored. It is best to embed the scene num‐
379 ber in the base part of the file name, not in the extension, because
380 the extension will not be a recognizeable image type.
381
382 When running a commandline utility, you can prepend an at sign @ to a
383 filename to read a list of image filenames from that file. This is con‐
384 venient in the event you have too many image filenames to fit on the
385 command line.
386
388 Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
389 the command line remains in effect for the set of images that follows,
390 until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
391 Some options only affect the decoding of images and others only the
392 encoding. The latter can appear after the final group of input images.
393
394 This is a combined list of the command-line options used by the Graph‐
395 icsMagick utilities (animate, compare, composite, convert, display,
396 identify, import, mogrify and montage).
397
398
399 In this document, angle brackets ("<>") enclose variables and curly
400 brackets ("{}") enclose optional parameters. For example, "-fuzz <dis‐
401 tance>{%}" means you can use the option "-fuzz 10" or "-fuzz 2%".
402
403
404 -adjoin
405 join images into a single multi-image file
406
407 By default, all images of an image sequence are stored in the
408 same file. However, some formats (e.g. JPEG) do not support
409 storing more than one image per file and only the first frame in
410 an image sequence will be saved unless the result is saved to
411 separate files. Use +adjoin to force saving multiple frames to
412 multiple numbered files. If +adjoin is used, then the output
413 filename must include a printf style formatting specification
414 for the numeric part of the filename. For example,
415
416 image%02d.miff
417
418
419 -affine <matrix>
420 drawing transform matrix
421
422 This option provides a transform matrix {sx,rx,ry,sy,tx,ty} for
423 use by subsequent -draw or -transform options.
424
425 -antialias
426 remove pixel aliasing
427
428 By default antialiasing algorithms are used when drawing objects
429 (e.g. lines) or rendering vector formats (e.g. WMF and Post‐
430 script). Use +antialias to disable use of antialiasing algo‐
431 rithms. Reasons to disable antialiasing include avoiding
432 increasing colors in the image, or improving rendering speed.
433
434 -append
435 append a set of images
436
437 This option creates a single image where the images in the orig‐
438 inal set are stacked top-to-bottom. If they are not of the same
439 width, any narrow images will be expanded to fit using the back‐
440 ground color. Use +append to stack images left-to-right. The
441 set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option. If
442 the -append option appears after all of the input images, all
443 images are appended.
444
445 -asc-cdl <spec>
446 apply ASC CDL color transform
447
448 Applies ("bakes in") the ASC CDL, which is a format for the
449 exchange of basic primary color grading information between
450 equipment and software from different manufacturers. The format
451 defines the math for three functions: slope, offset and power.
452 Each function uses a number for the red, green, and blue color
453 channels for a total of nine numbers comprising a single color
454 decision. The tenth number (optional) is for chromiance (satura‐
455 tion) as specified by ASC CDL 1.2.
456
457 The argument string is comma delimited and is in the following
458 form (but without invervening spaces or line breaks)
459
460 redslope,redoffset,redpower:
461 greenslope,greenoffset,greenpower:
462 blueslope,blueoffset,bluepower:
463 saturation
464
465
466 with the unity (no change) specification being:
467
468 "1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0"
469
470
471 -authenticate <string>
472 decrypt image with this password
473
474 Use this option to supply a password for decrypting an image or
475 an image sequence, if it is being read from a format such as PDF
476 that supports encryption. Encrypting images being written is
477 not supported.
478
479 -auto-orient
480 orient (rotate) image so it is upright
481
482 Adjusts the image orienation so that it is suitable for viewing.
483 Uses the orientation tag obtained from the image file or as sup‐
484 plied by the -orient option.
485
486 -average
487 average a set of images
488
489 The set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.
490 If the -average option appears after all of the input images,
491 all images are averaged.
492
493 -backdrop
494 display the image centered on a backdrop.
495
496 This backdrop covers the entire workstation screen and is useful
497 for hiding other X window activity while viewing the image. The
498 color of the backdrop is specified as the foreground color (X11
499 default is black). Refer to "X Resources", below, for details.
500
501 -background <color>
502 the background color
503
504 The color is specified using the format described under the
505 -fill option.
506
507 -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
508 pixels below the threshold become black
509
510 Use -black-threshold to set pixels with values below the speci‐
511 fied threshold to minimum value (black). If only one value is
512 supplied, or the red, green, and blue values are identical, then
513 intensity thresholding is used. If the color threshold values
514 are not identical then channel-based thresholding is used, and
515 color distortion will occur. Specify a negative value (e.g. -1)
516 if you want a channel to be ignored but you do want to threshold
517 a channel later in the list. If a percent (%) symbol is
518 appended, then the values are treated as a percentage of maximum
519 range.
520
521 -blue-primary <x>,<y>
522 blue chromaticity primary point
523
524 -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
525 blur the image with a Gaussian operator
526
527 Blur with the given radius and standard deviation (sigma).
528
529 -border <width>x<height>
530 surround the image with a border of color
531
532 See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
533
534 -bordercolor <color>
535 the border color
536
537 The color is specified using the format described under the
538 -fill option.
539
540 -borderwidth <geometry>
541 the border width
542
543 -box <color>
544 set the color of the annotation bounding box
545
546 The color is specified using the format described under the
547 -fill option.
548
549 See -draw for further details.
550
551 -channel <type>
552 the type of channel
553
554 Choose from: Red, Green, Blue, Opacity, Matte, Cyan, Magenta,
555 Yellow, Black, or Gray.
556
557 Use this option to extract a particular channel from the image.
558 Opacity, for example, is useful for extracting the opacity val‐
559 ues from an image.
560
561 -charcoal <factor>
562 simulate a charcoal drawing
563
564 -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
565 remove pixels from the interior of an image
566
567 Width and height give the number of columns and rows to remove,
568 and x and y are offsets that give the location of the leftmost
569 column and topmost row to remove.
570
571 The x offset normally specifies the leftmost column to remove.
572 If the -gravity option is present with NorthEast, East, or
573 SouthEast gravity, it gives the distance leftward from the right
574 edge of the image to the rightmost column to remove. Similarly,
575 the y offset normally specifies the topmost row to remove, but
576 if the -gravity option is present with SouthWest, South, or
577 SouthEast gravity, it specifies the distance upward from the
578 bottom edge of the image to the bottom row to remove.
579
580 The -chop option removes entire rows and columns, and moves the
581 remaining corner blocks leftward and upward to close the gaps.
582
583 -clip apply the clipping path, if one is present
584
585 If a clipping path is present, it will be applied to subsequent
586 operations.
587
588 For example, if you type the following command:
589
590 gm convert -clip -negate cockatoo.tif negated.tif
591
592
593 only the pixels within the clipping path are negated.
594
595 The -clip feature requires the XML library. If the XML library
596 is not present, the option is ignored.
597
598 -coalesce
599 merge a sequence of images
600
601 Each image N in the sequence after Image 0 is replaced with the
602 image created by flattening images 0 through N.
603
604 The set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.
605 If the -coalesce option appears after all of the input images,
606 all images are coalesced.
607
608 -colorize <value>
609 colorize the image with the pen color
610
611 Specify the amount of colorization as a percentage. You can
612 apply separate colorization values to the red, green, and blue
613 channels of the image with a colorization value list delimited
614 with slashes (e.g. 0/0/50).
615
616 The -colorize option may be used in conjunction with -modulate
617 to produce a nice sepia toned image like:
618
619 gm convert input.ppm -modulate 115,0,100 \
620 -colorize 7,21,50 output.ppm.
621
622
623 -colormap <type>
624 define the colormap type
625
626 Choose between shared or private.
627
628 This option only applies when the default X server visual is
629 PseudoColor or GRAYScale. Refer to -visual for more details. By
630 default, a shared colormap is allocated. The image shares colors
631 with other X clients. Some image colors could be approximated,
632 therefore your image may look very different than intended.
633 Choose Private and the image colors appear exactly as they are
634 defined. However, other clients may go technicolor when the
635 image colormap is installed.
636
637 -colors <value>
638 preferred number of colors in the image
639
640 The actual number of colors in the image may be less than your
641 request, but never more. Note, this is a color reduction option.
642 Images with less unique colors than specified with this option
643 will have any duplicate or unused colors removed. The ordering
644 of an existing color palette may be altered. When converting an
645 image from color to grayscale, convert the image to the gray
646 colorspace before reducing the number of colors since doing so
647 is most efficient. Refer to <a href="quantize.html">quantize for
648 more details.
649
650 Note, options -dither, -colorspace, and -treedepth affect the
651 color reduction algorithm.
652
653 -colorspace <value>
654 the type of colorspace
655
656 Choices are: CineonLog, CMYK, GRAY, HSL, HWB, OHTA, RGB,
657 Rec601Luma, Rec709Luma, Rec601YCbCr, Rec709YCbCr, Transparent,
658 XYZ, YCbCr, YIQ, YPbPr, or YUV.
659
660 Color reduction, by default, takes place in the RGB color space.
661 Empirical evidence suggests that distances in color spaces such
662 as YUV or YIQ correspond to perceptual color differences more
663 closely than do distances in RGB space. These color spaces may
664 give better results when color reducing an image. Refer to
665 quantize for more details. Two gray colorspaces are supported.
666 The Rec601Luma space is based on the recommendations for legacy
667 NTSC television (ITU-R BT.601-5). The Rec709Luma space is based
668 on the recommendations for HDTV (Rec. ITU-R BT.709-5) and is
669 suitable for use with computer graphics, and for contemporary
670 CRT displays. The GRAY colorspace currently selects the
671 Rec601Luma colorspace by default for backwards compatibly rea‐
672 sons. This default may be re-considered in the future.
673
674 Two YCbCr colorspaces are supported. The Rec601YCbCr space is
675 based on the recommendations for legacy NTSC television (ITU-R
676 BT.601-5). The Rec709CbCr space is based on the recommendations
677 for HDTV (Rec. ITU-R BT.709-5) and is suitable for suitable for
678 use with computer graphics, and for contemporary CRT displays.
679 The YCbCr colorspace specification is equivalent toRec601YCbCr.
680
681
682 The Transparent color space behaves uniquely in that it pre‐
683 serves the matte channel of the image if it exists.
684
685 The -colors or -monochrome option, or saving to a file format
686 which requires color reduction, is required for this option to
687 take effect.
688
689 -comment <string>
690 annotate an image with a comment
691
692 Use this option to assign a specific comment to the image, when
693 writing to an image format that supports comments. You can
694 include the image filename, type, width, height, or other image
695 attribute by embedding special format characters listed under
696 the -format option. The comment is not drawn on the image, but
697 is embedded in the image datastream via a "Comment" tag or simi‐
698 lar mechanism. If you want the comment to be visible on the
699 image itself, use the -draw option instead.
700
701 For example,
702
703 -comment "%m:%f %wx%h"
704
705
706 produces an image comment of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
707 titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
708
709 If the first character of string is @, the image comment is read
710 from a file titled by the remaining characters in the string.
711 Please note that if the string comes from an untrusted source
712 that it should be sanitized before use since otherwise the con‐
713 tent of an arbitrary readable file could be incorporated in a
714 comment in the output file (a security risk).
715
716 If the -comment option appears multiple times, only the last
717 comment is stored.
718
719 In PNG images, the comment is stored in a tEXt or zTXt chunk
720 with the keyword "comment".
721
722 -compose <operator>
723 the type of image composition
724
725 The description of composition uses abstract terminology in
726 order to allow the the description to be more clear, while
727 avoiding constant values which are specific to a particular
728 build configuration. Each image pixel is represented by red,
729 green, and blue levels (which are equal for a gray pixel).
730 MaxRGB is the maximum integral value which may be stored in the
731 red, green, or blue channels of the image. Each image pixel may
732 also optionally (if the image matte channel is enabled) have an
733 associated level of opacity (ranging from opaque to transpar‐
734 ent), which may be used to determine the influence of the pixel
735 color when compositing the pixel with another image pixel. If
736 the image matte channel is disabled, then all pixels in the
737 image are treated as opaque. The color of an opaque pixel is
738 fully visible while the color of a transparent pixel color is
739 entirely absent (pixel color is ignored).
740
741 By definition, raster images have a rectangular shape. All image
742 rows are of equal length, and all image columns have the same
743 number of rows. By treating the opacity channel as a visual
744 "mask" the rectangular image may be given a "shape" by treating
745 the opacity channel as a cookie-cutter for the image. Pixels
746 within the shape are opaque, while pixels outside the shape are
747 transparent. Pixels on the boundary of the shape may be between
748 opaque and transparent in order to provide antialiasing (visual‐
749 ly smooth edges). The description of the composition operators
750 use this concept of image "shape" in order to make the descrip‐
751 tion of the operators easier to understand. While it is conve‐
752 nient to describe the operators in terms of "shapes" they are by
753 no means limited to mask-style operations since they are based
754 on continuous floating-point mathematics rather than simple
755 boolean operations.
756
757 By default, the Over composite operator is used. The following
758 composite operators are available:
759
760 Over
761 In
762 Out
763 Atop
764 Xor
765 Plus
766 Minus
767 Add
768 Subtract
769 Difference
770 Divide
771 Multiply
772 Bumpmap
773 Copy
774 CopyRed
775 CopyGreen
776 CopyBlue
777 CopyOpacity
778 CopyCyan
779 CopyMagenta
780 CopyYellow
781 CopyBlack
782
783
784 The behavior of each operator is described below.
785
786
787 Over
788
789 The result will be the union of the two image shapes, with
790 opaque areas of change-image obscuring base-image in the
791 region of overlap.
792
793 In
794
795 The result is simply change-image cut by the shape of
796 base-image. None of the image data of base-image will be
797 in the result.
798
799 Out
800
801 The resulting image is change-image with the shape of
802 base-image cut out.
803
804 Atop
805
806 The result is the same shape as base-image, with change-
807 image obscuring base-image where the image shapes overlap.
808 Note this differs from over because the portion of change-
809 image outside base-image's shape does not appear in the
810 result.
811
812 Xor
813
814 The result is the image data from both change-image and
815 base-image that is outside the overlap region. The overlap
816 region will be blank.
817
818 Plus
819
820 The result is just the sum of the image data. Output val‐
821 ues are cropped to MaxRGB (no overflow). This operation is
822 independent of the matte channels.
823
824 Minus
825
826 The result of change-image - base-image, with underflow
827 cropped to zero. The matte channel is ignored (set to
828 opaque, full coverage).
829
830 Add
831
832 The result of change-image + base-image, with overflow
833 wrapping around (mod MaxRGB+1).
834
835 Subtract
836
837 The result of change-image - base-image, with underflow
838 wrapping around (mod MaxRGB+1). The add and subtract oper‐
839 ators can be used to perform reversible transformations.
840
841 Difference
842
843 The result of abs(change-image - base-image). This is use‐
844 ful for comparing two very similar images.
845
846 Divide
847
848 The result of change-image / base-image. This is useful
849 for improving the readability of text on unevenly illumi‐
850 nated photos (by using a gaussian blurred copy of change-
851 image as base-image).
852
853 Multiply
854
855 The result of change-image * base-image. This is useful
856 for the creation of drop-shadows.
857
858 Bumpmap
859
860 The result base-image shaded by change-image.
861
862 Copy
863
864 The resulting image is base-image replaced with change-
865 image. Here the matte information is ignored.
866
867 CopyRed
868
869 The resulting image is the red channel in base-image
870 replaced with the red channel in change-image. The other
871 channels are copied untouched.
872
873 CopyGreen
874
875 The resulting image is the green channel in base-image
876 replaced with the green channel in change-image. The other
877 channels are copied untouched.
878
879 CopyBlue
880
881 The resulting image is the blue channel in base-image
882 replaced with the blue channel in change-image. The other
883 channels are copied untouched.
884
885 CopyOpacity
886
887 The resulting image is the opacity channel in base-image
888 replaced with the opacity channel in change-image. The
889 other channels are copied untouched.
890
891 CopyCyan
892
893 The resulting image is the cyan channel in base-image
894 replaced with the cyan channel in change-image. The other
895 channels are copied untouched. Use of this operator
896 requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
897
898 CopyMagenta
899
900 The resulting image is the magenta channel in base-image
901 replaced with the magenta channel in change-image. The
902 other channels are copied untouched. Use of this operator
903 requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
904
905 CopyYellow
906
907 The resulting image is the yellow channel in base-image
908 replaced with the yellow channel in change-image. The
909 other channels are copied untouched. Use of this operator
910 requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
911
912 CopyBlack
913
914 The resulting image is the black channel in base-image
915 replaced with the black channel in change-image. The other
916 channels are copied untouched. Use of this operator
917 requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace. If
918 change-image is not in CMYK space, then the change-image
919 pixel intensities are used.
920
921
922
923
924 -compress <type>
925 the type of image compression
926
927 Choices are: None, BZip, Fax, Group3, Group4, JPEG, Lossless,
928 LZW, RLE, Zip, LZMA, JPEG2000, JPEG2000, JBIG, JBIG2, WebP, or
929 ZSTD.
930
931
932 Specify +compress to store the binary image in an uncompressed
933 format. The default is the compression type of the specified
934 image file.
935
936 "Lossless" refers to lossless JPEG, which is only available if
937 the JPEG library has been patched to support it. Use of lossless
938 JPEG is generally not recommended.
939
940 Use the -quality option to set the compression level to be used
941 by the JPEG, JPEG-2000, PNG, MIFF, MPEG, and TIFF encoders. Use
942 the -sampling-factor option to set the sampling factor to be
943 used by the DPX, JPEG, MPEG, and YUV encoders for downsampling
944 the chroma channels.
945
946 -contrast
947 enhance or reduce the image contrast
948
949 This option enhances the intensity differences between the
950 lighter and darker elements of the image. Use -contrast to
951 enhance the image or +contrast to reduce the image contrast.
952
953
954 For a more pronounced effect you can repeat the option:
955
956 gm convert rose: -contrast -contrast rose_c2.png
957
958
959 -convolve <kernel>
960 convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
961
962 The kernel is specified as a comma-separated list of floating
963 point values, ordered left-to right, starting with the top row.
964 The order of the kernel is determined by the square root of the
965 number of entries. Presently only square kernels are supported.
966
967 -create-directories
968 create output directory if required
969
970 Use this option with -output-directory if the input paths con‐
971 tain subdirectories and it is desired to create similar subdi‐
972 rectories in the output directory. Without this option, mogrify
973 will fail if the required output directory does not exist.
974
975 -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
976 preferred size and location of the cropped image
977
978 See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
979
980 The width and height give the size of the image that remains
981 after cropping, and x and y are offsets that give the location
982 of the top left corner of the cropped image with respect to the
983 original image. To specify the amount to be removed, use -shave
984 instead.
985
986 If the x and y offsets are present, a single image is generated,
987 consisting of the pixels from the cropping region. The offsets
988 specify the location of the upper left corner of the cropping
989 region measured downward and rightward with respect to the upper
990 left corner of the image. If the -gravity option is present
991 with NorthEast, East, or SouthEast gravity, it gives the dis‐
992 tance leftward from the right edge of the image to the right
993 edge of the cropping region. Similarly, if the -gravity option
994 is present with SouthWest, South, or SouthEast gravity, the dis‐
995 tance is measured upward between the bottom edges.
996
997 If the x and y offsets are omitted, a set of tiles of the speci‐
998 fied geometry, covering the entire input image, is generated.
999 The rightmost tiles and the bottom tiles are smaller if the
1000 specified geometry extends beyond the dimensions of the input
1001 image.
1002
1003 -cycle <amount>
1004 displace image colormap by amount
1005
1006 Amount defines the number of positions each colormap entry
1007 isshifted.
1008
1009
1010 -debug <events>
1011 enable debug printout
1012
1013 The events parameter specifies which events are to be logged.
1014 It can be either None, All, or a comma-separated list consisting
1015 of one or more of the following domains: Annotate, Blob, Cache,
1016 Coder, Configure, Deprecate, Error, Exception, FatalError,
1017 Information, Locale, Option, Render, Resource, TemporaryFile,
1018 Transform, User. Warning, or X11, For example, to log cache and
1019 blob events, use
1020
1021 gm convert -debug "Cache,Blob" rose: rose.png
1022
1023
1024 The "User" domain is normally empty, but developers can log
1025 "User" events in their private copy of GraphicsMagick.
1026
1027 Use the -log option to specify the format for debugging output.
1028
1029 Use +debug to turn off all logging.
1030
1031 An alternative to using -debug is to use the MAGICK_DEBUG envi‐
1032 ronment variable. The allowed values for the MAGICK_DEBUG envi‐
1033 ronment variable are the same as for the -debug option.
1034
1035 -deconstruct
1036 break down an image sequence into constituent parts
1037
1038 This option compares each image with the next in a sequence and
1039 returns the maximum bounding region of any pixel differences it
1040 discovers. This method can undo a coalesced sequence returned
1041 by the -coalesce option, and is useful for removing redundant
1042 information from a GIF or MNG animation.
1043
1044 The sequence of images is terminated by the appearance of any
1045 option. If the -deconstruct option appears after all of the
1046 input images, all images are deconstructed.
1047
1048 -define <key>{=<value>},...
1049 add coder/decoder specific options This option creates one or
1050 more definitions for coders and decoders to use while reading
1051 and writing image data. Definitions may be passed to coders and
1052 decoders to control options that are specific to certain image
1053 formats. If value is missing for a definition, an empty-valued
1054 definition of a flag will be created with that name. This is
1055 used to control on/off options. Use +define <key>,... to remove
1056 definitions previously created. Use +define "*" to remove all
1057 existing definitions.
1058
1059 The following definitions may be created:
1060
1061
1062 cineon:colorspace={rgb|cineonlog}
1063
1064 Use the cineon:colorspace option when reading a Cineon
1065 file to specify the colorspace the Cineon file uses. This
1066 overrides the colorspace type implied by the DPX header
1067 (if any).
1068
1069 dpx:bits-per-sample=<value>
1070
1071 If the dpx:bits-per-sample key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1072 will write DPX images with the specified bits per sample,
1073 overriding any existing depth value. If this option is not
1074 specified, then the value is based on the existing image
1075 depth value from the original image file. The DPX standard
1076 supports bits per sample values of 1, 8, 10, 12, and 16.
1077 Many DPX readers demand a sample size of 10 bits with type
1078 A padding (see below).
1079
1080 dpx:colorspace={rgb|cineonlog}
1081
1082 Use the dpx:colorspace option when reading a DPX file to
1083 specify the colorspace the DPX file uses. This overrides
1084 the colorspace type implied by the DPX header (if any).
1085
1086 dpx:packing-method={packed|a|b|lsbpad|msbpad}
1087
1088 DPX samples are output within 32-bit words. They may be
1089 tightly packed end-to-end within the words ("packed"),
1090 padded with null bits to the right of the sample ("a" or
1091 "lsbpad"), or padded with null bits to the left of the
1092 sample ("b" or "msbpad"). This option only has an effect
1093 for sample sizes of 10 or 12 bits. If samples are not
1094 packed, the DPX standard recommends type A padding. Many
1095 DPX readers demand a sample size of 10 bits with type A
1096 padding.
1097
1098 dpx:pixel-endian={lsb|msb}
1099
1100 Allows the user to specify the endian order of the pixels
1101 when reading or writing the DPX files. Sometimes this is
1102 useful if the file is (or must be) written incorrectly so
1103 that the file header and the pixels use different endian‐
1104 ness.
1105
1106 dpx:swap-samples={true|false}
1107
1108 dpx:swap-samples-read={true|false}
1109
1110 dpx:swap-samples-write={true|false}
1111
1112 GraphicsMagick strives to adhere to the DPX standard but
1113 certain aspects of the standard can be quite confusing. As
1114 a result, some 10-bit DPX files have Red and Blue inter‐
1115 changed, or Cb and Cr interchanged due to an different
1116 interpretation of the standard, or getting the wires
1117 crossed. The swap-samples option may be supplied when
1118 reading or writing in order to read or write using the
1119 necessary sample order. Use swap-samples-read when swap‐
1120 ping should only occur in the reader, or swap-samples-
1121 write when swapping should only occur in the writer.
1122
1123 gradient:direction={South|North|West|East|NorthWest|North‐
1124 East|SouthWest|SouthEast}
1125
1126 By default, the gradient coder produces a gradient from
1127 top to bottom ("South"). Since GraphicsMagick 1.3.35, the
1128 gradient direction may be specified to produce gradient
1129 vectors according to a gravity-like specification. The
1130 arguments are South (Top to Bottom), North (Bottom to
1131 Top), West (Right to Left), East (Left to Right), North‐
1132 West (Bottom-Right to Top-Left), NorthEast (Bottom-Left to
1133 Top-Right), SouthWest (Top-Right Bottom-Left), and South‐
1134 East (Top-Left to Bottom-Right).
1135
1136 jp2:rate=<value>
1137
1138 Specify the compression factor to use while writing
1139 JPEG-2000 files. The compression factor is the reciprocal
1140 of the compression ratio. The valid range is 0.0 to 1.0,
1141 with 1.0 indicating lossless compression. If defined, this
1142 value overrides the -quality setting. The default quality
1143 setting of 75 results in a rate value of 0.06641.
1144
1145 jpeg:block-smoothing={true|false}
1146
1147 Enables or disables block smoothing when reading a JPEG
1148 file (default enabled).
1149
1150 jpeg:dct-method=<value>
1151
1152 Selects the IJG JPEG library DCT implementation to use.
1153 The encoding implementations vary in speed and encoding
1154 error. The available choices for value are islow, ifast,
1155 float, default and fastest. Note that fastest might not
1156 necessarily be fastest on your CPU, depending on the
1157 choices made when the JPEG library was built and how your
1158 CPU behaves.
1159
1160 jpeg:fancy-upsampling={true|false}
1161
1162 Enables or disables fancy upsampling when reading a JPEG
1163 file (default enabled).
1164
1165 jpeg:max-scan-number=<value>
1166
1167 Specifies an integer value for the maximum number of pro‐
1168 gressive scans allowed in a JPEG file. The default maxi‐
1169 mum is 100 scans. This limit is imposed due to a weakness
1170 in the JPEG standard which allows small JPEG files to take
1171 many minutes or hours to be read.
1172
1173 jpeg:max-warnings=<value>
1174
1175 Specifies an integer value for how many warnings are
1176 allowed for any given error type before being promoted to
1177 a hard error. JPEG files producing excessive warnings
1178 indicate a problem with the file.
1179
1180 jpeg:optimize-coding={true|false}
1181
1182 Selects if huffman encoding should be used. Huffman encod‐
1183 ing is enabled by default, but may be disabled for very
1184 large images since it encoding requires that the entire
1185 image be buffered in memory. Huffman encoding produces
1186 smaller JPEG files at the expense of added compression
1187 time and memory consumption.
1188
1189 jpeg:preserve-settings
1190
1191 If the jpeg:preserve-settings flag is defined, the JPEG
1192 encoder will use the same "quality" and "sampling-factor"
1193 settings that were found in the input file, if the input
1194 was in JPEG format. These settings are also preserved if
1195 the input is a JPEG file and the output is a JNG file. If
1196 the colorspace of the output file differs from that of the
1197 input file, the quality setting is preserved but the sam‐
1198 pling-factors are not.
1199
1200 pcl:fit-to-page
1201
1202 If the pcl:fit-to-page flag is defined, then the printer
1203 is requested to scale the image to fit the page size
1204 (width and/or height).
1205 mng:maximum-loops=<value>
1206
1207 mng:maximum-loops specifies the maximum number of loops
1208 allowed to be specified by a MNG LOOP chunk. Without an
1209 imposed limit, a MNG file could request up to 2147483647
1210 loops, which could run for a very long time. The current
1211 default limit is 512 loops.
1212
1213 pdf:use-cropbox={true|false}
1214
1215 If the pdf:use-cropbox flag is set to true, then Ghost‐
1216 script is requested to apply the PDF crop box.
1217
1218 pdf:stop-on-error={true|false}
1219
1220 If the pdf:stop-on-error flag is set to true, then Ghost‐
1221 script is requested to stop processing the PDF when the
1222 first error is encountered. Otherwise it will attempt to
1223 process all requested pages.
1224
1225 ps:imagemask
1226
1227 If the ps:imagemask flag is defined, the PS3 and EPS3
1228 coders will create Postscript files that render bilevel
1229 images with the Postscript imagemask operator instead of
1230 the image operator.
1231
1232 ptif:minimum-geometry=<geometry>
1233
1234 If the ptif:minimum-geometry key is defined, GraphicsMag‐
1235 ick will use it to determine the minimum frame size to
1236 output when writing a pyramid TIFF file (a TIFF file con‐
1237 taining a succession of reduced versions of the first
1238 frame). The default minimum geometry is 32x32.
1239
1240 tiff:alpha={unspecified|associated|unassociated}
1241
1242 Specify the TIFF alpha channel type when reading or writ‐
1243 ing TIFF files, overriding the normal value. The default
1244 alpha channel type for new files is unspecified alpha.
1245 Existing alpha settings are preserved when converting from
1246 one TIFF file to another. When a TIFF file uses associated
1247 alpha, the image pixels are pre-multiplied (i.e. altered)
1248 with the alpha channel. Files with "associated" alpha
1249 appear as if they were alpha composited on a black back‐
1250 ground when the matte channel is disabled. If the unasso‐
1251 ciated alpha type is selected, then the alpha channel is
1252 saved without altering the pixels. Photoshop recognizes
1253 associated alpha as transparency information, if the file
1254 is saved with unassociated alpha, the alpha information is
1255 loaded as an independent channel. Note that for many
1256 years, ImageMagick and GraphicsMagick marked TIFF files as
1257 using associated alpha, without properly pre-multiplying
1258 the pixels.
1259
1260 tiff:fill-order={msb2lsb|lsb2msb}
1261
1262 If the tiff:fill-order key is defined, GraphicsMagick will
1263 use it to determine the bit fill order used while writing
1264 TIFF files. The normal default is "msb2lsb", which matches
1265 the native bit order of all modern CPUs. The only excep‐
1266 tion to this is when Group3 or Group4 FAX compression is
1267 requested since FAX machines send data in bit-reversed
1268 order and therefore RFC 2301 recommends using reverse
1269 order.
1270
1271 tiff:group-three-options=<value>
1272
1273 If the tiff:group-three-options key is defined, Graphics‐
1274 Magick will use it to set the group3 options tag when
1275 writing group3-compressed TIFF. Please see the TIFF spec‐
1276 ification for the usage of this tag. The default value is
1277 4.
1278
1279 tiff:ignore-tags=<tags>
1280
1281 If the tiff:ignore-tags key is defined, then it is used as
1282 a list of comma-delimited integer TIFF tag values to
1283 ignore while reading the TIFF file. This is useful in
1284 order to be able to read files which which otherwise fail
1285 to read due to problems with TIFF tags. Note that some
1286 TIFF tags are required in order to be able to read the
1287 image data at all.
1288
1289 tiff:report-warnings={false|true}
1290
1291 If the tiff:report-warnings key is defined and set to
1292 true, then TIFF warnings are reported as a warning excep‐
1293 tion rather than as a coder log message. Such warnings
1294 are reported after the image has been read or written.
1295 Most TIFF warnings are benign but sometimes they may help
1296 deduce problems with the TIFF file, or help detect that
1297 the TIFF file requires a special application to read suc‐
1298 cessfully due to the use of proprietary or specialized
1299 extensions.
1300
1301 tiff:sample-format={unsigned|ieeefp}
1302
1303 If the tiff:sample-format key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1304 will use it to determine the sample format used while
1305 writing TIFF files. The default is "unsigned". Specify
1306 "ieeefp" in order to write floating-point TIFF files with
1307 float (32-bit) or double (64-bit) values. Use the
1308 tiff:bits-per-sample define to determine the type of
1309 floating-point value to use.
1310
1311 tiff:max-sample-value=<value>
1312
1313 If the tiff:max-sample-value key is defined, GraphicsMag‐
1314 ick will use the assigned value as the maximum floating
1315 point value while reading or writing IEEE floating point
1316 TIFFs. Otherwise the maximum value is 1.0 or the value
1317 obtained from the file's SMaxSampleValue tag (if present).
1318 The floating point data is currently not scanned in
1319 advance to determine a best maximum sample value so if the
1320 range is not 1.0, or the SMaxSampleValue tag is not
1321 present, it may be necessary to (intelligently) use this
1322 parameter to properly read a file.
1323
1324 tiff:min-sample-value=<value>
1325
1326 If the tiff:min-sample-value key is defined, GraphicsMag‐
1327 ick will use the assigned value as the minimum floating
1328 point value while reading or writing IEEE floating point
1329 TIFFs. Otherwise the minimum value is 0.0 or the value
1330 obtained from the file's SMinSampleValue tag (if present).
1331
1332 tiff:bits-per-sample=<value>
1333
1334 If the tiff:bits-per-sample key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1335 will write images with the specified bits per sample,
1336 overriding any existing depth value. Value may be any in
1337 the range of 1 to 32, or 64 when the default ´unsigned'
1338 format is written, or 16/32/24/64 if IEEEFP format is
1339 written. Please note that the baseline TIFF 6.0 specifi‐
1340 cation only requires readers to handle certain powers of
1341 two, and the values to be handled depend on the nature of
1342 the image (e.g. colormapped, grayscale, RGB, CMYK).
1343
1344 tiff:samples-per-pixel=<value>
1345
1346 If the tiff:samples-per-pixel key is defined to a value,
1347 the TIFF coder will write TIFF images with the defined
1348 samples per pixel, overriding any value stored in the
1349 image. This option should not normally be used.
1350
1351 tiff:rows-per-strip=<value>
1352
1353 Allows the user to specify the number of rows per TIFF
1354 strip. Rounded up to a multiple of 16 when using JPEG
1355 compression. Ignored when using tiles.
1356
1357 tiff:strip-per-page=true
1358
1359 Requests that the image is written in a single TIFF strip.
1360 This is normally the default when group3 or group4 com‐
1361 pression is requested within reasonable limits. Requesting
1362 a single strip for large images may result in failure due
1363 to resource consumption in the writer or reader.
1364
1365 tiff:tile
1366
1367 Enable writing tiled TIFF (rather than stripped) using the
1368 default tile size. Tiled TIFF organizes the image as an
1369 array of smaller images (tiles) in order to enable random
1370 access.
1371
1372 tiff:tile-geometry=<width>x<height>
1373
1374 Specify the tile size to use while writing tiled TIFF.
1375 Width and height should be a multiple of 16. If the value
1376 is not a multiple of 16, then it will be rounded down.
1377 Enables tiled TIFF if it has not already been enabled.
1378 GraphicsMagick does not use tiled storage internally so
1379 tiles need to be converted back and forth from the inter‐
1380 nal scanline-oriented storage to tile-oriented storage.
1381 Testing with typical RGB images shows that useful square
1382 tile size values range from 128x128 to 1024x1024. Large
1383 images which require using a disk-based pixel cache bene‐
1384 fit from large tile sizes while images which fit in memory
1385 work well with smaller tile sizes.
1386
1387 tiff:tile-width=<width>
1388
1389 Specify the tile width to use while writing tiled TIFF.
1390 The tile height is then defaulted to an appropriate size.
1391 Width should be a multiple of 16. If the value is not a
1392 multiple of 16, then it will be rounded down. Enables
1393 tiled TIFF if it has not already been enabled.
1394
1395 tiff:tile-height=<height>
1396
1397 Specify the tile height to use while writing tiled TIFF.
1398 The tile width is then defaulted to an appropriate size.
1399 Height should be a multiple of 16. If the value is not a
1400 multiple of 16, then it will be rounded down. Enables
1401 tiled TIFF if it has not already been enabled.
1402
1403 tiff:webp-lossless={TRUE|FALSE}
1404
1405 Specify a value of TRUE to enable lossless mode while
1406 writing WebP-compressed TIFF files. The WebP webp:lossless
1407 option may also be used. The quality factor set by the
1408 -quality option may be used to influence the level of
1409 effort expended while compressing.
1410
1411 tiff:zstd-compress-level=<value>
1412
1413 Specify the compression level to use while writing Zstd-
1414 compressed TIFF files. The valid range is 1 to 22. If this
1415 define is not specified, then the 'quality' value is used
1416 such that the default quality setting of 75 is translated
1417 to a compress level of 9 such that ´quality' has a useful
1418 range of 10-184 if used for this purpose.
1419
1420 webp:lossless={true|false}
1421
1422 Enable lossless encoding.
1423
1424 webp:method={0-6}
1425
1426 Quality/speed trade-off.
1427
1428 webp:image-hint={default,graph,photo,picture}
1429
1430 Hint for image type.
1431
1432 webp:target-size=<integer>
1433
1434 Target size in bytes.
1435
1436 webp:target-psnr=<float>
1437
1438 Minimal distortion to try to achieve.
1439
1440 webp:segments={1-4}
1441
1442 Maximum number of segments to use.
1443
1444 webp:sns-strength={0-100}
1445
1446 Spatial Noise Shaping.
1447
1448 webp:filter-strength={0-100}
1449
1450 Filter strength.
1451
1452 webp:filter-sharpness={0-7}
1453
1454 Filter sharpness.
1455
1456 webp:filter-type={0,1}
1457
1458 Filtering type. 0 = simple, 1 = strong (only used if fil‐
1459 ter-strength > 0 or autofilter is enabled).
1460
1461 webp:auto-filter={true|false}
1462
1463 Auto adjust filter's strength.
1464
1465 webp:alpha-compression=<integer>
1466
1467 Algorithm for encoding the alpha plane (0 = none, 1 = com‐
1468 pressed with WebP lossless). Default is 1.
1469
1470 webp:alpha-filtering=<integer>
1471
1472 Predictive filtering method for alpha plane. 0: none, 1:
1473 fast, 2: best. Default is 1.
1474
1475 webp:alpha-quality={0-100}
1476
1477 Between 0 (smallest size) and 100 (lossless). Default is
1478 100.
1479
1480 webp:pass=[1..10]
1481
1482 Number of entropy-analysis passes.
1483
1484 webp:show-compressed={true|false}
1485
1486 Export the compressed picture back. In-loop filtering is
1487 not applied.
1488
1489 webp:preprocessing=[0,1,2]
1490
1491 0=none, 1=segment-smooth, 2=pseudo-random dithering
1492
1493 webp:partitions=[0-3]
1494
1495 log2(number of token partitions) in [0..3]. Default is 0
1496 for easier progressive decoding.
1497
1498 webp:partition-limit={0-100}
1499
1500 Quality degradation allowed to fit the 512k limit on pre‐
1501 diction modes coding (0: no degradation, 100: maximum pos‐
1502 sible degradation).
1503
1504 webp:emulate-jpeg-size={true|false}
1505
1506 If true, compression parameters will be remapped to better
1507 match the expected output size from JPEG compression. Gen‐
1508 erally, the output size will be similar but the degrada‐
1509 tion will be lower.
1510
1511 webp:thread-level=<integer>
1512
1513 If non-zero, try and use multi-threaded encoding.
1514
1515 webp:low-memory={true|false}
1516
1517 If set, reduce memory usage (but increase CPU use)
1518
1519 webp:use-sharp-yuv={true|false}
1520
1521 If set, if needed, use sharp (and slow) RGB->YUV conver‐
1522 sion
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527 For example, to create a postscript file that will render only
1528 the black pixels of a bilevel image, use:
1529
1530 gm convert bilevel.tif -define ps:imagemask eps3:stencil.ps
1531
1532
1533 -delay <1/100ths of a second>
1534 display the next image after pausing
1535
1536 This option is useful for regulating the animation of image
1537 sequences Delay/100 seconds must expire before the display of
1538 the next image. The default is no delay between each showing of
1539 the image sequence. The maximum delay is 65535.
1540
1541 You can specify a delay range (e.g. -delay 10-500) which sets
1542 the minimum and maximum delay.
1543
1544 -density <width>x<height>
1545 horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image This
1546 option specifies the image resolution to store while encoding a
1547 raster image or the canvas resolution while rendering (reading)
1548 vector formats such as Postscript, PDF, WMF, and SVG into a
1549 raster image. Image resolution provides the unit of measure to
1550 apply when rendering to an output device or raster image. The
1551 default unit of measure is in dots per inch (DPI). The -units
1552 option may be used to select dots per centimeter instead.
1553 The default resolution is 72 dots per inch, which is equivalent
1554 to one point per pixel (Macintosh and Postscript standard). Com‐
1555 puter screens are normally 72 or 96 dots per inch while printers
1556 typically support 150, 300, 600, or 1200 dots per inch. To
1557 determine the resolution of your display, use a ruler to measure
1558 the width of your screen in inches, and divide by the number of
1559 horizontal pixels (1024 on a 1024x768 display). If the file
1560 format supports it, this option may be used to update the stored
1561 image resolution. Note that Photoshop stores and obtains image
1562 resolution from a proprietary embedded profile. If this profile
1563 is not stripped from the image, then Photoshop will continue to
1564 treat the image using its former resolution, ignoring the image
1565 resolution specified in the standard file header. The density
1566 option is an attribute and does not alter the underlying raster
1567 image. It may be used to adjust the rendered size for desktop
1568 publishing purposes by adjusting the scale applied to the pix‐
1569 els. To resize the image so that it is the same size at a dif‐
1570 ferent resolution, use the -resample option.
1571
1572 -depth <value>
1573 depth of the image
1574
1575 This is the number of bits of color to preserve in the image.
1576 Any value between 1 and QuantumDepth (build option) may be spec‐
1577 ified, although 8 or 16 are the most common values. Use this
1578 option to specify the depth of raw images whose depth is unknown
1579 such as GRAY, RGB, or CMYK, or to change the depth of any image
1580 after it has been read. The depth option is applied to the pix‐
1581 els immediately so it may be used as a form of simple compres‐
1582 sion by discarding the least significant bits. Reducing the
1583 depth in advance may speed up color quantization, and help cre‐
1584 ate smaller file sizes when using a compression algorithm like
1585 LZW or ZIP.
1586
1587 -descend
1588 obtain image by descending window hierarchy
1589
1590 -despeckle
1591 reduce the speckles within an image
1592
1593 -displace <horizontal scale>x<vertical scale>
1594 shift image pixels as defined by a displacement map
1595
1596 With this option, composite image is used as a displacement map.
1597 Black, within the displacement map, is a maximum positive dis‐
1598 placement. White is a maximum negative displacement and middle
1599 gray is neutral. The displacement is scaled to determine the
1600 pixel shift. By default, the displacement applies in both the
1601 horizontal and vertical directions. However, if you specify
1602 mask, composite image is the horizontal X displacement and mask
1603 the vertical Y displacement.
1604
1605 -display <host:display[.screen]>
1606 specifies the X server to contact
1607
1608 This option is used with convert for obtaining image or font
1609 from this X server. See X(1).
1610
1611 -dispose <method>
1612 GIF disposal method
1613
1614 The Disposal Method indicates the way in which the graphic is to
1615 be treated after being displayed.
1616
1617 Here are the valid methods:
1618
1619 Undefined No disposal specified.
1620 None Do not dispose between frames.
1621 Background Overwrite the image area with
1622 the background color.
1623 Previous Overwrite the image area with
1624 what was there prior to rendering
1625 the image.
1626
1627
1628 -dissolve <percent>
1629 dissolve an image into another by the given percent
1630
1631 The opacity of the composite image is multiplied by the given
1632 percent, then it is composited over the main image.
1633
1634 -dither
1635 apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
1636
1637 The basic strategy of dithering is to trade intensity resolution
1638 for spatial resolution by averaging the intensities of several
1639 neighboring pixels. Images which suffer from severe contouring
1640 when reducing colors can be improved with this option.
1641
1642 The -colors or -monochrome option is required for this option to
1643 take effect.
1644
1645 Use +dither to turn off dithering and to render PostScript with‐
1646 out text or graphic aliasing. Disabling dithering often (but not
1647 always) leads to decreased processing time.
1648
1649 -draw <string>
1650 annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
1651
1652 Use this option to annotate an image with one or more graphic
1653 primitives. The primitives include shapes, text, transforma‐
1654 tions, and pixel operations. The shape primitives are
1655
1656 point x,y
1657 line x0,y0 x1,y1
1658 rectangle x0,y0 x1,y1
1659 roundRectangle x0,y0 x1,y1 wc,hc
1660 arc x0,y0 x1,y1 a0,a1
1661 ellipse x0,y0 rx,ry a0,a1
1662 circle x0,y0 x1,y1
1663 polyline x0,y0 ... xn,yn
1664 polygon x0,y0 ... xn,yn
1665 Bezier x0,y0 ... xn,yn
1666 path path specification
1667 image operator x0,y0 w,h filename
1668
1669
1670 The text primitive is
1671
1672 text x0,y0 string
1673
1674
1675 The text gravity primitive is
1676
1677 gravity NorthWest, North, NorthEast, West, Center,
1678 East, SouthWest, South, or SouthEast
1679
1680
1681 The text gravity primitive only affects the placement of text
1682 and does not interact with the other primitives. It is equiva‐
1683 lent to using the -gravity commandline option, except that it is
1684 limited in scope to the -draw option in which it appears.
1685
1686 The transformation primitives are
1687
1688 rotate degrees
1689 translate dx,dy
1690 scale sx,sy
1691 skewX degrees
1692 skewY degrees
1693
1694
1695 The pixel operation primitives are
1696
1697 color x0,y0 method
1698 matte x0,y0 method
1699
1700
1701 The shape primitives are drawn in the color specified in the
1702 preceding -stroke option. Except for the line and point primi‐
1703 tives, they are filled with the color specified in the preceding
1704 -fill option. For unfilled shapes, use -fill none.
1705
1706 Point requires a single coordinate.
1707
1708 Line requires a start and end coordinate.
1709
1710 Rectangle expects an upper left and lower right coordinate.
1711
1712 RoundRectangle has the upper left and lower right coordinates
1713 and the width and height of the corners.
1714
1715 Circle has a center coordinate and a coordinate for the outer
1716 edge.
1717
1718 Use Arc to inscribe an elliptical arc within a rectangle. Arcs
1719 require a start and end point as well as the degree of rotation
1720 (e.g. 130,30 200,100 45,90).
1721
1722 Use Ellipse to draw a partial ellipse centered at the given
1723 point with the x-axis and y-axis radius and start and end of arc
1724 in degrees (e.g. 100,100 100,150 0,360).
1725
1726 Finally, polyline and polygon require three or more coordinates
1727 to define its boundaries. Coordinates are integers separated by
1728 an optional comma. For example, to define a circle centered at
1729 100,100 that extends to 150,150 use:
1730
1731 -draw 'circle 100,100 150,150'
1732
1733
1734 Paths (See Paths) represent an outline of an object which is
1735 defined in terms of moveto (set a new current point), lineto
1736 (draw a straight line), curveto (draw a curve using a cubic
1737 Bezier), arc (elliptical or circular arc) and closepath (close
1738 the current shape by drawing a line to the last moveto) ele‐
1739 ments. Compound paths (i.e., a path with subpaths, each consist‐
1740 ing of a single moveto followed by one or more line or curve
1741 operations) are possible to allow effects such as "donut holes"
1742 in objects.
1743
1744 Use image to composite an image with another image. Follow the
1745 image keyword with the composite operator, image location, image
1746 size, and filename:
1747
1748 -draw 'image Over 100,100 225,225 image.jpg'
1749
1750
1751 You can use 0,0 for the image size, which means to use the
1752 actual dimensions found in the image header. Otherwise, it will
1753 be scaled to the given dimensions. See -compose for a descrip‐
1754 tion of the composite operators.
1755
1756 Use text to annotate an image with text. Follow the text coordi‐
1757 nates with a string. If the string has embedded spaces, enclose
1758 it in single or double quotes. Optionally you can include the
1759 image filename, type, width, height, or other image attribute by
1760 embedding special format character. See -comment for details.
1761
1762 For example,
1763
1764
1765 -draw 'text 100,100 "%m:%f %wx%h"'
1766
1767
1768 annotates the image with MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
1769 titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
1770
1771 If the first character of string is @, the text is read from a
1772 file titled by the remaining characters in the string. Please
1773 note that if the string comes from an untrusted source that it
1774 should be sanitized before use (a security risk).
1775
1776 Rotate rotates subsequent shape primitives and text primitives
1777 about the origin of the main image. If the -region option pre‐
1778 cedes the -draw option, the origin for transformations is the
1779 upper left corner of the region.
1780
1781 Translate translates them.
1782
1783 Scale scales them.
1784
1785 SkewX and SkewY skew them with respect to the origin of the main
1786 image or the region.
1787
1788 The transformations modify the current affine matrix, which is
1789 initialized from the initial affine matrix defined by the
1790 -affine option. Transformations are cumulative within the -draw
1791 option. The initial affine matrix is not affected; that matrix
1792 is only changed by the appearance of another -affine option. If
1793 another -draw option appears, the current affine matrix is
1794 reinitialized from the initial affine matrix.
1795
1796 Use color to change the color of a pixel to the fill color (see
1797 -fill). Follow the pixel coordinate with a method:
1798
1799 point
1800 replace
1801 floodfill
1802 filltoborder
1803 reset
1804
1805
1806 Consider the target pixel as that specified by your coordinate.
1807 The point method recolors the target pixel. The replace method
1808 recolors any pixel that matches the color of the target pixel.
1809 Floodfill recolors any pixel that matches the color of the tar‐
1810 get pixel and is a neighbor, whereas filltoborder recolors any
1811 neighbor pixel that is not the border color. Finally, reset
1812 recolors all pixels.
1813
1814 Use matte to the change the pixel matte value to transparent.
1815 Follow the pixel coordinate with a method (see the color primi‐
1816 tive for a description of methods). The point method changes the
1817 matte value of the target pixel. The replace method changes the
1818 matte value of any pixel that matches the color of the target
1819 pixel. Floodfill changes the matte value of any pixel that
1820 matches the color of the target pixel and is a neighbor, whereas
1821 filltoborder changes the matte value of any neighbor pixel that
1822 is not the border color (-bordercolor). Finally reset changes
1823 the matte value of all pixels.
1824
1825 You can set the primitive color, font, and font bounding box
1826 color with -fill, -font, and -box respectively. Options are pro‐
1827 cessed in command line order so be sure to use these options
1828 before the -draw option.
1829
1830 -edge <radius>
1831 detect edges within an image
1832
1833 -emboss <radius>
1834 emboss an image
1835
1836 -encoding <type>
1837 specify the text encoding
1838
1839 Choose from AdobeCustom, AdobeExpert, AdobeStandard, AppleRoman,
1840 BIG5, GB2312, Latin 2, None, SJIScode, Symbol, Unicode, Wansung.
1841
1842 -endian <type>
1843 specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
1844
1845 MSB indicates big-endian (e.g. SPARC, Motorola 68K) while LSB
1846 indicates little-endian (e.g. Intel 'x86, VAX) byte ordering.
1847 Native indicates to use the normal ordering for the current CPU.
1848 This option currently only influences the CMYK, DPX, GRAY, RGB,
1849 and TIFF, formats.
1850
1851 Use +endian to revert to unspecified endianness.
1852
1853 -enhance
1854 apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
1855
1856 -equalize
1857 perform histogram equalization to the image
1858
1859 -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
1860 composite image on background color canvas image
1861
1862 This option composites the image on a new background color
1863 (-background) canvas image of size <width>x<height>. The exist‐
1864 ing image content is composited at the position specified by
1865 geometry x and y offset and/or desired gravity (-gravity) using
1866 the current image compose (-compose) method. Image content
1867 which falls outside the bounds of the new image dimensions is
1868 discarded.
1869
1870 For example, this command creates a thumbnail of an image, and
1871 centers it on a red color backdrop image, offsetting the canvas
1872 ten pixels to the left and five pixels up, with respect to the
1873 thumbnail:
1874
1875 gm convert infile.jpg -thumbnail 120x80 -background red
1876 -gravity center \
1877 -extent 140x100-10-5 outfile.jpg
1878
1879
1880 This command reduces or expands a JPEG image to fit on an
1881 800x600 display:
1882
1883 gm convert -size 800x600 input.jpg \
1884 -resize 800x600 -background black \
1885 -compose Copy -gravity center \
1886 -extent 800x600 \
1887 -quality 92 output.jpg
1888
1889
1890 If the aspect ratio of the input image isn't exactly 4:3, then
1891 the image is centered on an 800x600 black canvas.
1892
1893 -file <filename>
1894 write annotated difference image to file
1895
1896 If -file is specified, then an annotated difference image is
1897 generated and written to the specified file. Pixels which differ
1898 between the reference and compare images are modified from those
1899 in the compare image so that the changed pixels become more
1900 obvious. Some images may require use of an alternative high‐
1901 light style (see -highlight-style) or highlight color (see
1902 -highlight-color) before the changes are obvious.
1903
1904 -fill <color>
1905 color to use when filling a graphic primitive
1906
1907 Colors are represented in GraphicsMagick in the same form used
1908 by SVG. Use "gm convert -list color" to list named colors:
1909
1910 name (named color)
1911 #RGB (hex numbers, 4 bits each)
1912 #RRGGBB (8 bits each)
1913 #RRRGGGBBB (12 bits each)
1914 #RRRRGGGGBBBB (16 bits each)
1915 #RGBA (4 bits each)
1916 #RRGGBBAA (8 bits each)
1917 #RRRGGGBBBAAA (12 bits each)
1918 #RRRRGGGGBBBBAAAA (16 bits each)
1919 rgb(r,g,b) (r,g,b are decimal numbers)
1920 rgba(r,g,b,a) (r,g,b,a are decimal numbers)
1921
1922
1923 Enclose the color specification in quotation marks to prevent
1924 the "#" or the parentheses from being interpreted by your shell.
1925
1926 For example,
1927
1928 gm convert -fill blue ...
1929 gm convert -fill "#ddddff" ...
1930 gm convert -fill "rgb(65000,65000,65535)" ...
1931
1932
1933 The shorter forms are scaled up, if necessary by replication.
1934 For example, #3af, #33aaff, and #3333aaaaffff are all equiva‐
1935 lent.
1936
1937 See -draw for further details.
1938
1939 -filter <type>
1940 use this type of filter when resizing an image
1941
1942 Use this option to affect the resizing operation of an image
1943 (see -geometry). Choose from these filters (ordered by approxi‐
1944 mate increasing CPU time):
1945
1946 Point
1947 Box
1948 Triangle
1949 Hermite
1950 Hanning
1951 Hamming
1952 Blackman
1953 Gaussian
1954 Quadratic
1955 Cubic
1956 Catrom
1957 Mitchell
1958 Lanczos
1959 Bessel
1960 Sinc
1961
1962
1963 The default filter is automatically selected to provide the best
1964 quality while consuming a reasonable amount of time. The
1965 Mitchell filter is used if the image supports a palette, sup‐
1966 ports a matte channel, or is being enlarged, otherwise the Lanc‐
1967 zos filter is used.
1968
1969 -flatten
1970 flatten a sequence of images
1971
1972 In some file formats (e.g. Photoshop's PSD) complex images may
1973 be represented by "layers" (independent images) which must be
1974 composited in order to obtain the final rendition. The -flatten
1975 option accomplishes this composition. The sequence of images is
1976 replaced by a single image created by compositing each image in
1977 turn, while respecting composition operators and page offsets.
1978 While -flatten is immediately useful for eliminating layers, it
1979 is also useful as a general-purpose composition tool.
1980
1981 The sequence of images is terminated by the appearance of any
1982 option. If the -flatten option appears after all of the input
1983 images, all images are flattened. Also see -mosaic which is
1984 similar to -flatten except that it adds a suitably-sized canvas
1985 base image.
1986
1987 For example, this composites an image on top of a 640x400 trans‐
1988 parent black canvas image:
1989
1990 gm convert -size 640x300 xc:transparent \
1991 -compose over -page +0-100 \
1992 frame.png -flatten output.png
1993
1994
1995 and this flattens a Photoshop PSD file:
1996
1997 gm convert input.psd -flatten output.png
1998
1999
2000 -flip create a "mirror image"
2001
2002 reflect the scanlines in the vertical direction.
2003
2004 -flop create a "mirror image"
2005
2006 reflect the scanlines in the horizontal direction.
2007
2008 -font <name>
2009 use this font when annotating the image with text
2010
2011 You can tag a font to specify whether it is a PostScript, True‐
2012 Type, or X11 font. For example, Arial.ttf is a TrueType font,
2013 ps:helvetica is PostScript, and x:fixed is X11.
2014
2015 -foreground <color>
2016 define the foreground color
2017
2018 The color is specified using the format described under the
2019 -fill option.
2020
2021 -format <type>
2022 the image format type
2023
2024 When used with the mogrify utility, this option will convert any
2025 image to the image format you specify. See GraphicsMagick(1)
2026 for a list of image format types supported by GraphicsMagick, or
2027 see the output of 'gm -list format'.
2028
2029 By default the file is written to its original name. However,
2030 if the filename extension matches a supported format, the exten‐
2031 sion is replaced with the image format type specified with -for‐
2032 mat. For example, if you specify tiff as the format type and
2033 the input image filename is image.gif, the output image filename
2034 becomes image.tiff.
2035
2036 -format <string>
2037 output formatted image characteristics
2038
2039 When used with the identify utility, or the convert utility with
2040 output written to the 'info:-' file specification, use this
2041 option to print information about the image in a format of your
2042 choosing. You can include the image filename, type, width,
2043 height, Exif data, or other image attributes by embedding spe‐
2044 cial format characters:
2045
2046 %b file size
2047 %c comment
2048 %d directory
2049 %e filename extension
2050 %f filename
2051 %g page dimensions and offsets
2052 %h height
2053 %i input filename
2054 %k number of unique colors
2055 %l label
2056 %m magick
2057 %n number of scenes
2058 %o output filename
2059 %p page number
2060 %q image bit depth
2061 %r image type description
2062 %s scene number
2063 %t top of filename
2064 %u unique temporary filename
2065 %w width
2066 %x horizontal resolution
2067 %y vertical resolution
2068 %A transparency supported
2069 %C compression type
2070 %D GIF disposal method
2071 %G Original width and height
2072 %H page height
2073 %M original filename specification
2074 %O page offset (x,y)
2075 %P page dimensions (width,height)
2076 %Q compression quality
2077 %T time delay (in centi-seconds)
2078 %U resolution units
2079 %W page width
2080 %X page horizontal offset (x)
2081 %Y page vertical offset (y)
2082 %@ trim bounding box
2083 %# signature
2084 \n newline
2085 \r carriage return
2086 %% %
2087
2088
2089 For example,
2090
2091 -format "%m:%f %wx%h"
2092
2093
2094 displays MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image titled bird.miff
2095 and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
2096
2097 If the first character of string is @, the format is read from a
2098 file titled by the remaining characters in the string. Please
2099 note that if the string comes from an untrusted source that it
2100 should be sanitized before use since this may be used to incor‐
2101 porate any readable file on the system (a security risk).
2102
2103 The values of image type (%r) which may be returned include:
2104
2105 Bilevel
2106 Grayscale
2107 GrayscaleMatte
2108 Palette
2109 PaletteMatte
2110 TrueColor
2111 TrueColorMatte
2112 ColorSeparation
2113 ColorSeparationMatte
2114 Optimize
2115
2116
2117 You can also use the following special formatting syntax to
2118 print Exif information contained in the file:
2119
2120 %[EXIF:<tag>]
2121
2122
2123 Where "<tag>" may be one of the following:
2124
2125 * (print all Exif tags, in keyword=data format)
2126 ! (print all Exif tags, in tag_number format)
2127 #hhhh (print data for Exif tag #hhhh)
2128 ImageWidth
2129 ImageLength
2130 BitsPerSample
2131 Compression
2132 PhotometricInterpretation
2133 FillOrder
2134 DocumentName
2135 ImageDescription
2136 Make
2137 Model
2138 StripOffsets
2139 Orientation
2140 SamplesPerPixel
2141 RowsPerStrip
2142 StripByteCounts
2143 XResolution
2144 YResolution
2145 PlanarConfiguration
2146 ResolutionUnit
2147 TransferFunction
2148 Software
2149 DateTime
2150 Artist
2151 WhitePoint
2152 PrimaryChromaticities
2153 TransferRange
2154 JPEGProc
2155 JPEGInterchangeFormat
2156 JPEGInterchangeFormatLength
2157 YCbCrCoefficients
2158 YCbCrSubSampling
2159 YCbCrPositioning
2160 ReferenceBlackWhite
2161 CFARepeatPatternDim
2162 CFAPattern
2163 BatteryLevel
2164 Copyright
2165 ExposureTime
2166 FNumber
2167 IPTC/NAA
2168 ExifOffset
2169 InterColorProfile
2170 ExposureProgram
2171 SpectralSensitivity
2172 GPSInfo
2173 ISOSpeedRatings
2174 OECF
2175 ExifVersion
2176 DateTimeOriginal
2177 DateTimeDigitized
2178 ComponentsConfiguration
2179 CompressedBitsPerPixel
2180 ShutterSpeedValue
2181 ApertureValue
2182 BrightnessValue
2183 ExposureBiasValue
2184 MaxApertureValue
2185 SubjectDistance
2186 MeteringMode
2187 LightSource
2188 Flash
2189 FocalLength
2190 MakerNote
2191 UserComment
2192 SubSecTime
2193 SubSecTimeOriginal
2194 SubSecTimeDigitized
2195 FlashPixVersion
2196 ColorSpace
2197 ExifImageWidth
2198 ExifImageLength
2199 InteroperabilityOffset
2200 FlashEnergy
2201 SpatialFrequencyResponse
2202 FocalPlaneXResolution
2203 FocalPlaneYResolution
2204 FocalPlaneResolutionUnit
2205 SubjectLocation
2206 ExposureIndex
2207 SensingMethod
2208 FileSource
2209 SceneType
2210
2211
2212 JPEG specific information (from reading a JPEG file) may be
2213 obtained like this:
2214
2215 %[JPEG-<tag>]
2216
2217
2218 Where "<tag>" may be one of the following:
2219
2220 * (all JPEG-related tags, in
2221 keyword=data format)
2222 Quality IJG JPEG "quality" estimate
2223 Colorspace JPEG colorspace numeric ID
2224 Colorspace-Name JPEG colorspace name
2225 Sampling-factors JPEG sampling factors
2226
2227
2228 Please note that JPEG has no notion of "quality" and that the
2229 quality metric used by, and estimated by the software is based
2230 on the quality metric established by IJG JPEG 6b. Other
2231 encoders (e.g. that used by Adobe Photoshop) use different
2232 encoding metrics.
2233
2234 Surround the format specification with quotation marks to pre‐
2235 vent your shell from misinterpreting any spaces and square
2236 brackets.
2237
2238 -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
2239 surround the image with an ornamental border
2240
2241 See -geometry for details about the geometry specification. The
2242 -frame option is not affected by the -gravity option.
2243
2244 The color of the border is specified with the -mattecolor com‐
2245 mand line option.
2246
2247 -frame include the X window frame in the imported image
2248
2249 -fuzz <distance>{%}
2250 colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
2251
2252 A number of algorithms search for a target color. By default the
2253 color must be exact. Use this option to match colors that are
2254 close (in Euclidean distance) to the target color in RGB 3D
2255 space. For example, if you want to automatically trim the edges
2256 of an image with -trim but the image was scanned and the target
2257 background color may differ by a small amount. This option can
2258 account for these differences.
2259
2260 The distance can be in absolute intensity units or, by appending
2261 "%", as a percentage of the maximum possible intensity (255,
2262 65535, or 4294967295).
2263
2264 -gamma <value>
2265 level of gamma correction
2266
2267 The same color image displayed on two different workstations may
2268 look different due to differences in the display monitor. Use
2269 gamma correction to adjust for this color difference. Reasonable
2270 values extend from 0.8 to 2.3. Gamma less than 1.0 darkens the
2271 image and gamma greater than 1.0 lightens it. Large adjustments
2272 to image gamma may result in the loss of some image information
2273 if the pixel quantum size is only eight bits (quantum range 0 to
2274 255).
2275
2276 You can apply separate gamma values to the red, green, and blue
2277 channels of the image with a gamma value list delimited with
2278 slashes (e.g., 1.7/2.3/1.2).
2279
2280 Use +gamma value to set the image gamma level without actually
2281 adjusting the image pixels. This option is useful if the image
2282 is of a known gamma but not set as an image attribute (e.g. PNG
2283 images).
2284
2285 -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
2286 blur the image with a Gaussian operator
2287
2288 Use the given radius and standard deviation (sigma).
2289
2290 -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
2291 Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
2292
2293 The -geometry option is used for a number of different purposes,
2294 depending on the utility it is used with.
2295
2296 For the X11 commands ('animate', 'display', and 'import'), it
2297 specifies the preferred size and location of the Image window.
2298 By default, the window size is the image size and the location
2299 is chosen by you (or your window manager) when it is mapped.
2300 For the 'import', 'convert', 'mogrify' utility commands it may
2301 be used to specify the desired size when resizing an image. In
2302 this case, symbols representing resize options may be appended
2303 to the geometry string to influence how the resize request is
2304 treated.
2305
2306 See later notes corresponding to usage by particular commands.
2307 The following notes apply to when -geometry is used to express a
2308 resize request, taking into account the current properties of
2309 the image.
2310
2311 By default, the width and height are maximum values. That is,
2312 the image is expanded or contracted to fit the width and height
2313 value while maintaining the aspect ratio of the image.
2314
2315 Append a ^ to the geometry so that the image aspect ratio is
2316 maintained when the image is resized, but the resulting width or
2317 height are treated as minimum values rather than maximum values.
2318
2319 Append a ! (exclamation point) to the geometry to force the
2320 image size to exactly the size you specify. For example, if you
2321 specify 640x480! the image width is set to 640 pixels and height
2322 to 480.
2323
2324 If only the width is specified, without the trailing 'x', then
2325 height is set to width (e.g., -geometry 100 is the same as
2326 -geometry 100x100). If only the width is specified but with the
2327 trailing 'x', then width assumes the value and the height is
2328 chosen to maintain the aspect ratio of the image. Similarly, if
2329 only the height is specified prefixed by 'x' (e.g., -geometry
2330 x256), the width is chosen to maintain the aspect ratio.
2331
2332 To specify a percentage width or height instead, append %. The
2333 image size is multiplied by the width and height percentages to
2334 obtain the final image dimensions. To increase the size of an
2335 image, use a value greater than 100 (e.g. 125%). To decrease an
2336 image's size, use a percentage less than 100.
2337
2338 Use @ to specify the maximum area in pixels of an image.
2339
2340 Use > to change the dimensions of the image only if its width or
2341 height exceeds the geometry specification. < resizes the image
2342 only if both of its dimensions are less than the geometry speci‐
2343 fication. For example, if you specify '640x480>' and the image
2344 size is 256x256, the image size does not change. However, if the
2345 image is 512x512 or 1024x1024, it is resized to 480x480.
2346 Enclose the geometry specification in quotation marks to prevent
2347 the < or > from being interpreted by your shell as a file redi‐
2348 rection.
2349
2350 When used with animate and display, offsets are handled in the
2351 same manner as in X(1) and the -gravity option is not used. If
2352 the x is negative, the offset is measured leftward from the
2353 right edge of the screen to the right edge of the image being
2354 displayed. Similarly, negative y is measured between the bottom
2355 edges. The offsets are not affected by "%"; they are always
2356 measured in pixels.
2357
2358 When used as a composite option, -geometry gives the dimensions
2359 of the image and its location with respect to the composite
2360 image. If the -gravity option is present with NorthEast, East,
2361 or SouthEast gravity, the x represents the distance from the
2362 right edge of the image to the right edge of the composite
2363 image. Similarly, if the -gravity option is present with South‐
2364 West, South, or SouthEast gravity, y is measured between the
2365 bottom edges. Accordingly, a positive offset will never point in
2366 the direction outside of the image. The offsets are not
2367 affected by "%"; they are always measured in pixels. To specify
2368 the dimensions of the composite image, use the -resize option.
2369
2370 When used as a convert, import or mogrify option, -geometry is
2371 synonymous with -resize and specifies the size of the output
2372 image. The offsets, if present, are ignored.
2373
2374 When used as a montage option, -geometry specifies the image
2375 size and border size for each tile; default is 256x256+0+0.
2376 Negative offsets (border dimensions) are meaningless. The
2377 -gravity option affects the placement of the image within the
2378 tile; the default gravity for this purpose is Center. If the
2379 "%" sign appears in the geometry specification, the tile size is
2380 the specified percentage of the original dimensions of the first
2381 tile. To specify the dimensions of the montage, use the -resize
2382 option.
2383
2384 -gravity <type>
2385 direction primitive gravitates to when annotating the image.
2386
2387 Choices are: NorthWest, North, NorthEast, West, Center, East,
2388 SouthWest, South, SouthEast.
2389
2390 The direction you choose specifies where to position the text
2391 when annotating the image. For example Center gravity forces the
2392 text to be centered within the image. By default, the image
2393 gravity is NorthWest. See -draw for more details about graphic
2394 primitives. Only the text primitive is affected by the -gravity
2395 option.
2396
2397 The -gravity option is also used in concert with the -geometry
2398 option and other options that take <geometry> as a parameter,
2399 such as the -crop option. See -geometry for details of how the
2400 -gravity option interacts with the <x> and <y> parameters of a
2401 geometry specification.
2402
2403 When used as an option to composite, -gravity gives the direc‐
2404 tion that the image gravitates within the composite.
2405
2406 When used as an option to montage, -gravity gives the direction
2407 that an image gravitates within a tile. The default gravity is
2408 Center for this purpose.
2409
2410 -green-primary <x>,<y>
2411 green chromaticity primary point
2412
2413 -hald-clut <clut>
2414 apply a Hald CLUT to the image
2415
2416 A Hald CLUT ("Color Look-Up Table") is a special square color
2417 image which contains a look-up table for red, green, and blue.
2418 The size of the Hald CLUT image is determined by its order. The
2419 width (and height) of a Hald CLUT is the cube of the order. For
2420 example, a Hald CLUT of order 8 is 512x512 pixels (262,144 col‐
2421 ors) and of order 16 is 4096x4096 (16,777,216 colors). A spe‐
2422 cial CLUT is the identity CLUT which which causes no change to
2423 the input image. In order to use the Hald CLUT, one takes an
2424 identity CLUT and adjusts its colors in some way. The modified
2425 CLUT can then be used to transform any number of images in an
2426 identical way.
2427
2428 GraphicsMagick contains a built-in identity CLUT generator via
2429 the IDENTITY coder. For example reading from the file name
2430 IDENTITY:8 returns an identity CLUT of order 8. Typical Hald
2431 CLUT identity images have an order of between 8 and 16. The
2432 default order for the IDENTITY CLUT generator is 8. Interpola‐
2433 tion is used so it is not usually necessary for CLUT images to
2434 be very large. The PNG file format is ideal for storing Hald
2435 CLUT images because it compresses them very well.
2436
2437 -help print usage instructions
2438
2439 -highlight-color <color>
2440 pixel annotation color
2441
2442 Specifies the color to use when annotating difference pixels.
2443
2444 -highlight-style <style>
2445 pixel annotation style
2446
2447 Specifies the pixel difference annotation style used to draw
2448 attention to changed pixels. May be one of Assign, Threshold,
2449 Tint, or XOR; where Assign replaces the pixel with the highlight
2450 color (see -highlight-color), Threshold replaces the pixel with
2451 black or white based on the difference in intensity, Tint alpha
2452 tints the pixel with the highlight color, and XOR does an XOR
2453 between the pixel and the highlight color.
2454
2455 -iconGeometry <geometry>
2456 specify the icon geometry
2457
2458 Offsets, if present in the geometry specification, are handled
2459 in the same manner as the -geometry option, using X11 style to
2460 handle negative offsets.
2461
2462 -iconic
2463 iconic animation
2464
2465 -immutable
2466 make image immutable
2467
2468 -implode <factor>
2469 implode image pixels about the center
2470
2471 -intent <type>
2472 use this type of rendering intent when managing the image color
2473
2474 Use this option to affect the the color management operation of
2475 an image (see -profile). Choose from these intents: Absolute,
2476 Perceptual, Relative, Saturation.
2477
2478 The default intent is undefined.
2479
2480 -interlace <type>
2481 the type of interlacing scheme
2482
2483 Choices are: None, Line, Plane, or Partition. The default is
2484 None.
2485
2486 This option is used to specify the type of interlacing scheme
2487 for raw image formats such as RGB or YUV. None means do not
2488 interlace (RGBRGBRGBRGBRGBRGB...),
2489
2490 Line uses scanline interlacing
2491 (RRR...GGG...BBB...RRR...GGG...BBB...), and Plane uses plane
2492 interlacing (RRRRRR...GGGGGG...BBBBBB...).
2493
2494 Partition is like plane except the different planes are saved to
2495 individual files (e.g. image.R, image.G, and image.B).
2496
2497 Use Line to create an interlaced PNG or GIF or progressive JPEG
2498 image.
2499
2500 -label <name>
2501 assign a label to an image
2502
2503 Use this option to assign a specific label to the image, when
2504 writing to an image format that supports labels, such as TIFF,
2505 PNG, MIFF, or PostScript. You can include the the image file‐
2506 name, type, width, height, or other image attribute by embedding
2507 special format character. A label is not drawn on the image,
2508 but is embedded in the image datastream via a "Label" tag or
2509 similar mechanism. If you want the label to be visible on the
2510 image itself, use the -draw option. See -comment for details.
2511
2512 For example,
2513
2514 -label "%m:%f %wx%h"
2515
2516
2517 produces an image label of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
2518 titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
2519
2520 If the first character of string is @, the image label is read
2521 from a file titled by the remaining characters in the string.
2522 Please note that if the string comes from an untrusted source
2523 that it should be sanitized before use since otherwise the con‐
2524 tent of an arbitrary readable file might be incorporated into
2525 the image label (a security risk).
2526
2527 If the -label option appears multiple times, only the last label
2528 is stored.
2529
2530 In PNG images, the label is stored in a tEXt or zTXt chunk with
2531 the keyword "label".
2532
2533 When converting to PostScript, use this option to specify a
2534 header string to print above the image. Specify the label font
2535 with -font.
2536
2537 When creating a montage, by default the label associated with an
2538 image is displayed with the corresponding tile in the montage.
2539 Use the +label option to suppress this behavior.
2540
2541
2542
2543 -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
2544 perform local adaptive thresholding
2545
2546 Perform local adaptive thresholding using the specified width,
2547 height, and offset. The offset is a distance in sample space
2548 from the mean, as an absolute integer ranging from 0 to the max‐
2549 imum sample value or as a percentage. If the percent option is
2550 supplied, then the offset is computed as a percentage of the
2551 quantum range. It is strongly recommended to use the percent
2552 option so that results are not sensitive to pixel quantum depth.
2553
2554 For example,
2555
2556 -colorspace gray -lat "10x10-5%"
2557
2558
2559 will help clarify a scanned grayscale or color document, produc‐
2560 ing a bi-level equivalent.
2561
2562 -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
2563 adjust the level of image contrast
2564
2565 Give one, two or three values delimited with commas: black-
2566 point, gamma, white-point (e.g. 10,1.0,250 or 2%,0.5,98%). The
2567 black and white points range from 0 to MaxRGB or from 0 to 100%;
2568 if the white point is omitted it is set to MaxRGB-black_point.
2569 If a "%" sign is present anywhere in the string, the black and
2570 white points are percentages of MaxRGB. Gamma is an exponent
2571 that ranges from 0.1 to 10.; if it is omitted, the default of
2572 1.0 (no gamma correction) is assumed. This interface works simi‐
2573 lar to Photoshop's "Image->Adjustments->Levels..." "Input Lev‐
2574 els" interface.
2575
2576 -limit <type> <value>
2577 Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height or Threads
2578 resource limit
2579
2580 By default, resource limits are estimated based on the available
2581 resources of the system. The resource limits are Disk, maximum
2582 total disk space consumed; File, maximum number of file descrip‐
2583 tors allowed to be open at once; Map, maximum total number of
2584 file bytes which may be memory mapped; Memory, maximum total
2585 number of bytes of heap memory used for image storage; Pixels,
2586 maximum absolute image size (per image); Width, maximum image
2587 pixels width; Height, maximum image pixels height; and Threads,
2588 the maximum number of worker threads to use per OpenMP thread
2589 team.
2590
2591 These resource limits are used to decide if (for a given image)
2592 the decoded image ("pixel cache") should be stored in heap mem‐
2593 ory (RAM), in a memory-mapped disk file, or in a disk file
2594 accessed via read/write I/O. The number of total pixels in one
2595 image, and/or the width/height, may also be limited in order to
2596 force the reading, or creation of images larger than the limit
2597 (in pixels) to intentionally fail. The disk limit establishes an
2598 overall limit since using the disk is the means of last resort.
2599 When the disk limit has been reached, no more images may be
2600 read.
2601
2602 The value argument is an absolute value, but may have standard
2603 binary suffix characters applied ('K', 'M', 'G', 'T', 'P', 'E')
2604 to apply a scaling to the value (based on a multiplier of 1024).
2605 Any additional characters are ignored. For example, '-limit Pix‐
2606 els 10MP' limits the maximum image size to 10 megapixels and
2607 '-limit memory 32MB -limit map 64MB' limits memory and memory
2608 mapped files to 32 megabytes and 64 megabytes respectively.
2609
2610 Resource limits may also be set using environment variables. The
2611 environment variables MAGICK_LIMIT_DISK, MAGICK_LIMIT_FILES,
2612 MAGICK_LIMIT_MAP, MAGICK_LIMIT_MEMORY, MAGICK_LIMIT_PIXELS, MAG‐
2613 ICK_LIMIT_WIDTH, MAGICK_LIMIT_HEIGHT,and OMP_NUM_THREADS may be
2614 used to set the limits for disk space, open files, memory mapped
2615 size, heap memory, per-image pixels, image width, image height,
2616 and threads respectively.
2617
2618 Use the option -list resource list the current limits.
2619
2620 -linewidth
2621 the line width for subsequent draw operations
2622
2623 -list <type>
2624 the type of list
2625
2626 Choices are: Color, Delegate, Format, Magic, Module, Resource,
2627 or Type. The Module option is only available if GraphicsMagick
2628 was built to support loadable modules.
2629
2630 This option lists information about the GraphicsMagick configu‐
2631 ration.
2632
2633 -log <string>
2634 Specify format for debug log
2635
2636 This option specifies the format for the log printed when the
2637 -debug option is active.
2638
2639 You can display the following components by embedding special
2640 format characters:
2641
2642 %d domain
2643 %e event
2644 %f function
2645 %l line
2646 %m module
2647 %p process ID
2648 %r real CPU time
2649 %t wall clock time
2650 %u user CPU time
2651 %% percent sign
2652 \n newline
2653 \r carriage return
2654
2655
2656 For example:
2657
2658 gm convert -debug coders -log "%u %m:%l %e" in.gif out.png
2659
2660
2661 The default behavior is to print all of the components.
2662
2663 -loop <iterations>
2664 add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
2665
2666 A value other than zero forces the animation to repeat itself up
2667 to iterations times.
2668
2669 -magnify
2670 magnify the image
2671
2672 The image size is doubled using linear interpolation.
2673
2674 -magnify <factor>
2675 magnify the image
2676
2677 The displayed image is magnified by factor.
2678
2679 -map <filename>
2680 choose a particular set of colors from this image
2681
2682 [convert or mogrify]
2683
2684 By default, color reduction chooses an optimal set of colors
2685 that best represent the original image. Alternatively, you can
2686 choose a particular set of colors from an image file with this
2687 option.
2688
2689 Use +map to reduce all images in the image sequence that follows
2690 to a single optimal set of colors that best represent all the
2691 images. The sequence of images is terminated by the appearance
2692 of any option. If the +map option appears after all of the
2693 input images, all images are mapped.
2694
2695 -map <type>
2696 display image using this type.
2697
2698 [animate or display]
2699
2700 Choose from these Standard Colormap types:
2701
2702 best
2703 default
2704 gray
2705 red
2706 green
2707 blue
2708
2709
2710 The X server must support the Standard Colormap you choose, oth‐
2711 erwise an error occurs. Use list as the type and display
2712 searches the list of colormap types in top-to-bottom order until
2713 one is located. See xstdcmap(1) for one way of creating Standard
2714 Colormaps.
2715
2716 -mask <filename>
2717 Specify a clipping mask
2718
2719 The image read from the file is used as a clipping mask. It
2720 must have the same dimensions as the image being masked.
2721
2722 If the mask image contains an opacity channel, the opacity of
2723 each pixel is used to define the mask. Otherwise, the intensity
2724 (gray level) of each pixel is used. Unmasked (black) pixels are
2725 modified while masked pixels (not black) are protected from
2726 alteration.
2727
2728 Use +mask to remove the clipping mask.
2729
2730 It is not necessary to use -clip to activate the mask; -clip is
2731 implied by -mask.
2732
2733 -matte store matte channel if the image has one
2734
2735 If the image does not have a matte channel, create an opaque
2736 one.
2737
2738 Use +matte to ignore the matte channel (treats it as opaque) and
2739 to avoid writing a matte channel in the output file.
2740
2741 For the compare command, -matte will add an opaque matte channel
2742 to images if they do not already have a matte channel, and matte
2743 will be enabled for both images. Likewise, if +matte is used,
2744 the matte channel is disabled for both images. This makes it
2745 easier to compare images regardless of if they already have a
2746 matte channel.
2747
2748 -mattecolor <color>
2749 specify the color to be used with the -frame option
2750
2751 The color is specified using the format described under the
2752 -fill option.
2753
2754 -maximum-error <limit>
2755 specifies the maximum amount of total image error
2756
2757 Specifies the maximum amount of total image error (based on com‐
2758 parison using a specified metric) before an error ("image dif‐
2759 ference exceeds limit") is reported. The error is reported via
2760 a non-zero command execution return status.
2761
2762 -median <radius>
2763 apply a median filter to the image
2764
2765 -metric <metric>
2766 comparison metric (MAE, MSE, PAE, PSNR, RMSE)
2767
2768 -minify <factor>
2769 minify the image
2770
2771 The image size is halved using linear interpolation.
2772
2773 -mode <value>
2774 mode of operation
2775
2776 The available montage modes are frame to place the images in a
2777 rectangular grid while adding a decorative frame with drop‐
2778 shadow, unframe to place undecorated images in a rectangular
2779 grid, and concatenate to pack the images closely together with‐
2780 out any well-defined grid or decoration.
2781
2782 -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
2783 vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
2784
2785 Specify the percent change in brightness, color saturation, and
2786 hue separated by commas. Default argument values are 100 per‐
2787 cent, resulting in no change. For example, to increase the color
2788 brightness by 20% and decrease the color saturation by 10% and
2789 leave the hue unchanged, use: -modulate 120,90.
2790
2791 Hue is the percentage of absolute rotation from the current
2792 position. For example 50 results in a counter-clockwise rotation
2793 of 90 degrees, 150 results in a clockwise rotation of 90
2794 degrees, with 0 and 200 both resulting in a rotation of 180
2795 degrees.
2796
2797 -monitor
2798 show progress indication
2799
2800 A simple command-line progress indication is shown while the
2801 command is running. The process indication shows the operation
2802 currently being performed and the percent completed. Commands
2803 using X11 may replace the command line progress indication with
2804 a graphical one once an image has been displayed.
2805
2806 -monochrome
2807 transform the image to black and white
2808
2809 -morph <frames>
2810 morphs an image sequence
2811
2812 Both the image pixels and size are linearly interpolated to give
2813 the appearance of a meta-morphosis from one image to the next.
2814
2815 The sequence of images is terminated by the appearance of any
2816 option. If the -morph option appears after all of the input
2817 images, all images are morphed.
2818
2819 -mosaic
2820 create a mosaic from an image or an image sequence
2821
2822 The -mosaic option provides a flexible way to composite one or
2823 more images onto a solid-color canvas image. It works similar to
2824 -flatten except that a base canvas image is automatically cre‐
2825 ated with a suitable size given the image size, page dimensions,
2826 and page offsets of images to be composited. The color of the
2827 base canvas image may be set via the -background option. The
2828 default canvas color is 'white', but 'black' or 'transparent'
2829 may be more suitable depending on the composition algorithm
2830 requested.
2831
2832 The -compose option may be used to specify the composition algo‐
2833 rithm to use when compositing the subsequent image on the base
2834 canvas.
2835
2836 The -page option can be used to establish the dimensions of the
2837 mosaic and to position the subsequent image within the mosaic.
2838 If the -page argument does not specify width and height, then
2839 the canvas dimensions are evaluated based on the image sizes and
2840 offsets.
2841
2842 The sequence of images is terminated by the appearance of any
2843 option. If the -mosaic option appears after all of the input
2844 images, all images are included in the mosaic.
2845
2846 The following is an example of composing an image based on red,
2847 green, and blue layers extracted from a sequence of images and
2848 pasted on the canvas image at specified offsets:
2849
2850 gm convert -background black \
2851 -compose CopyRed -page +0-100 red.png \
2852 -compose CopyGreen -page +0+40 green.png \
2853 -compose CopyBlue -page +0+180 blue.png \
2854 -mosaic output.png
2855
2856
2857 -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
2858 Simulate motion blur
2859
2860 Simulate motion blur by convolving the image with a Gaussian
2861 operator of the given radius and standard deviation (sigma). For
2862 reasonable results, radius should be larger than sigma. If
2863 radius is zero, then a suitable radius is automatically selected
2864 based on sigma. The angle specifies the angle that the object is
2865 coming from (side which is blurred).
2866
2867 -name name an image
2868
2869 -negate
2870 replace every pixel with its complementary color
2871
2872 The red, green, and blue intensities of an image are negated.
2873 White becomes black, yellow becomes blue, etc. Use +negate to
2874 only negate the grayscale pixels of the image.
2875
2876 -noise <radius|type>
2877 add or reduce noise in an image
2878
2879 The principal function of noise peak elimination filter is to
2880 smooth the objects within an image without losing edge informa‐
2881 tion and without creating undesired structures. The central idea
2882 of the algorithm is to replace a pixel with its next neighbor in
2883 value within a pixel window, if this pixel has been found to be
2884 noise. A pixel is defined as noise if and only if this pixel is
2885 a maximum or minimum within the pixel window.
2886
2887 Use radius to specify the width of the neighborhood.
2888
2889 Use +noise followed by a noise type to add noise to an image.
2890 The noise added modulates the existing image pixels. Choose from
2891 these noise types:
2892
2893 Uniform
2894 Gaussian
2895 Multiplicative
2896 Impulse
2897 Laplacian
2898 Poisson
2899 Random (uniform distribution)
2900
2901
2902 -noop NOOP (no option)
2903
2904 The -noop option can be used to terminate a group of images and
2905 reset all options to their default values, when no other option
2906 is desired.
2907
2908 -normalize
2909 transform image to span the full range of color values
2910
2911 This is a contrast enhancement technique based on the image his‐
2912 togram.
2913
2914 When computing the contrast enhancement values, the histogram
2915 edges are truncated so that the majority of the image pixels are
2916 considered in the constrast enhancement, and outliers (e.g. ran‐
2917 dom noise or minute details) are ignored. The default is that
2918 0.1 percent of the histogram entries are ignored. The percent‐
2919 age of the histogram to ignore may be specified by using the
2920 -set option with the histogram-threshold parameter similar to
2921 -set histogram-threshold 0.01 to specify 0.01 percent. Use 0
2922 percent to use the entire histogram, with possibly diminished
2923 contrast enhancement.
2924
2925 -opaque <color>
2926 change this color to the pen color within the image
2927
2928 The color is specified using the format described under the
2929 -fill option. The color is replaced if it is identical to the
2930 target color, or close enough to the target color in a 3D space
2931 as defined by the Euclidean distance specified by -fuzz.
2932
2933 See -fill and -fuzz for more details.
2934
2935 -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
2936 apply a mathematical, bitwise, or value operator to an image
2937 channel
2938
2939 Apply a low-level mathematical, bitwise, or value operator to a
2940 selected image channel or all image channels. Operations which
2941 result in negative results are reset to zero, and operations
2942 which overflow the available range are reset to the maximum pos‐
2943 sible value.
2944
2945 Select a channel from: Red, Green, Blue, Opacity, Matte, Cyan,
2946 Magenta, Yellow, Black, All, or Gray. All only modifies the
2947 color channels and does not modify the Opacity channel. Except
2948 for the threshold operators, All operates on each channel inde‐
2949 pendently so that operations are on a per-channel basis.
2950
2951 Gray treats the color channels as a grayscale intensity and per‐
2952 forms the requested operation on the equivalent pixel intensity
2953 so the result is a gray image. Select an operator from Add,
2954 And, Assign, Depth, Divide, Gamma, Negate, LShift, Log, Max,
2955 Min, Multiply, Or, Pow, RShift, Subtract, Threshold, Threshold-
2956 White, Threshold-White-Negate, Threshold-Black, Threshold-Black-
2957 Negate, Xor, Noise-Gaussian, Noise-Impulse, Noise-Laplacian,
2958 Noise-Multiplicative, Noise-Poisson, Noise-Random, and Noise-
2959 Uniform.
2960
2961 Rvalue may be any floating point or integer value. Normally
2962 rvalue will be in the range of 0 to MaxRGB, where MaxRGB is the
2963 largest quantum value supported by the GraphicsMagick build
2964 (255, 65535, or 4294967295) but values outside this range are
2965 useful for some arithmetic operations. Arguments to logical or
2966 bit-wise operations are rounded to a positive integral value
2967 prior to use. If a percent (%) symbol is appended to the argu‐
2968 ment, then the argument has a range of 0 to 100 percent.
2969
2970 The following is a description of the operators:
2971
2972
2973 Add
2974
2975 Result is rvalue added to channel value.
2976
2977 And
2978
2979 Result is the logical AND of rvalue with channel value.
2980
2981 Assign
2982
2983 Result is rvalue.
2984
2985 Depth
2986
2987 Result is channel value adjusted so that it may be
2988 (approximately) stored in the specified number of bits
2989 without additional loss.
2990
2991 Divide
2992
2993 Result is channel value divided by rvalue.
2994
2995 Gamma
2996
2997 Result is channel value gamma adjusted by rvalue.
2998
2999 LShift
3000
3001 Result is channel value bitwise left shifted by rvalue
3002 bits.
3003
3004 Log
3005
3006 Result is computed as log(value*rvalue+1)/log(rvalue+1).
3007
3008 Max
3009
3010 Result is assigned to rvalue if rvalue is greater than
3011 value.
3012
3013 Min
3014
3015 Result is assigned to rvalue if rvalue is less than value.
3016
3017 Multiply
3018
3019 Result is channel value multiplied by rvalue.
3020
3021 Negate
3022
3023 Result is inverse of channel value (like a film negative).
3024 An rvalue must be supplied but is currently not used.
3025 Inverting the image twice results in the original image.
3026
3027 Or
3028
3029 Result is the logical OR of rvalue with channel value.
3030
3031 Pow
3032
3033 Result is computed as pow(value,rvalue). Similar to Gamma
3034 except that rvalue is not inverted.
3035
3036 RShift
3037
3038 Result is channel value bitwise right shifted by rvalue
3039 bits.
3040
3041 Subtract
3042
3043 Result is channel value minus rvalue.
3044
3045 Threshold
3046
3047 Result is maximum (white) if channel value is greater than
3048 rvalue, or minimum (black) if it is less than or equal to
3049 rvalue. If all channels are specified, then thresholding
3050 is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3051
3052 Threshold-white
3053
3054 Result is maximum (white) if channel value is greater than
3055 rvalue and is unchanged if it is less than or equal to
3056 rvalue. This can be used to remove apparent noise from the
3057 bright parts of an image. If all channels are specified,
3058 then thresholding is done based on computed pixel inten‐
3059 sity.
3060
3061 Threshold-White-Negate
3062
3063 Result is set to black if channel value is greater than
3064 rvalue and is unchanged if it is less than or equal to
3065 rvalue. If all channels are specified, then thresholding
3066 is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3067
3068 Threshold-black
3069
3070 Result is minimum (black) if channel value is less than
3071 than rvalue and is unchanged if it is greater than or
3072 equal to rvalue. This can be used to remove apparent noise
3073 from the dark parts of an image. If all channels are spec‐
3074 ified, then thresholding is done based on computed pixel
3075 intensity.
3076
3077 Threshold-Black-Negate
3078
3079 Result is set to white if channel value is less than than
3080 rvalue and is unchanged if it is greater than or equal to
3081 rvalue. If all channels are specified, then thresholding
3082 is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3083
3084 Xor
3085
3086 Result is the logical XOR of rvalue with channel value. An
3087 interesting property of XOR is that performing the same
3088 operation twice results in the original value.
3089
3090 Noise-Gaussian
3091
3092 Result is the current channel value modulated with gauss‐
3093 ian noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3094
3095 Noise-Impulse
3096
3097 Result is the current channel value modulated with impulse
3098 noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3099
3100 Noise-Laplacian
3101
3102 Result is the current channel value modulated with lapla‐
3103 cian noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3104
3105 Noise-Multiplicative
3106
3107 Result is the current channel value modulated with multi‐
3108 plicative gaussian noise according to the intensity speci‐
3109 fied by rvalue.
3110
3111 Noise-Poisson
3112
3113 Result is the current channel value modulated with poisson
3114 noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3115
3116 Noise-Random
3117
3118 Result is the current channel value modulated with random
3119 (uniform distribution) noise according to the intensity
3120 specified by rvalue. The initial noise intensity
3121 (rvalue=1.0) is the range of one pixel quantum span.
3122
3123 Noise-Uniform
3124
3125 Result is the channel value with uniform noise applied
3126 according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3127
3128
3129
3130
3131 As an example, the Assign operator assigns a fixed value to a
3132 channel. For example, this command sets the red channel to the
3133 mid-range value:
3134
3135 gm convert in.bmp -operator red assign "50%" out.bmp
3136
3137
3138 The following applies 50% thresholding to the image and returns
3139 a gray image:
3140
3141 gm convert in.bmp -operator gray threshold "50%" out.bmp
3142
3143
3144 -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
3145 ordered dither the image
3146
3147 The channel or channels specified in the channeltype argument
3148 are reduced to binary, using an ordered dither method. The
3149 choices for channeltype are All, Intensity, Red, Green, Blue,
3150 Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Opacity
3151
3152 When channeltype is "All", the color samples are dithered into a
3153 gray level and then that gray level is stored in the three color
3154 channels. Separately, the opacity channel is dithered into a
3155 bilevel opacity value which is stored in the opacity channel.
3156
3157 When channeltype is "Intensity", only the color samples are
3158 dithered. When channeltype is "opacity" or "matte", only the
3159 opacity channel is dithered. When a color channel is specified,
3160 only that channel is dithered.
3161
3162 The choices for N are 2 through 7. The image is divided into NxN
3163 pixel tiles. In each tile, some or all pixels are turned to
3164 white depending on their intensity. For each N, (N**2)+1 levels
3165 of gray can be represented. For N == 2, 3, or 4, the pixels are
3166 turned to white in an order that maximizes dispersion (i.e.,
3167 reduces granularity), while for N == 5, 6, and 7, they are
3168 turned to white in an order that creates a roughly circular
3169 black blob in the middle of each tile. An attractive "half-
3170 tone" looking image can be obtained by first rotating the image
3171 45 degrees, performing a 5x5 ordered-dither operation, then
3172 rotating it back to the original orientation and cropping to the
3173 original image dimensions. If the original image is gamma-
3174 encoded, it is adviseable to convert it to linear intensity
3175 first, e.g., with the "-gamma 0.45455" option.
3176
3177 -output-directory <directory>
3178 output files to directory
3179
3180 Use -output-directory to specify a directory under which to
3181 write the output files. Normally mogrify overwrites the input
3182 files, but with this option the output files may be written to a
3183 different directory tree so that the input files are preserved.
3184 The algorithm used preserves all of the input path specification
3185 in the output path so that the user-specified input path
3186 (including any sub-directory part) is appended to the output
3187 path. If the input file lacks an extension, then a suitable
3188 extension is automatically added to the output file. The user
3189 is responsible for creating the output directory specified as an
3190 argument, but subdirectories will be created as needed if the
3191 -create-directories option is supplied. This option may be used
3192 to apply transformations on files from one directory and write
3193 the transformed files to a different directory. In conjunction
3194 with -create-directories, this option is designed to support
3195 transforming whole directory trees of files provided that the
3196 relative path of the input file is included as part the list of
3197 filenames.
3198
3199 -orient <orientation>
3200 Set the image orientation attribute
3201
3202 Sets the image orientation attribute. The image orientation
3203 attribute is compatible with the TIFF orientation tag (and the
3204 EXIF orientation tag). Accepted values are undefined, TopLeft,
3205 TopRight, BottomRight, BottomLeft, LeftTop, RightTop, RightBot‐
3206 tom, LeftBottom, and hyphenated versions thereof (e.g. left-bot‐
3207 tom). Please note that GraphicsMagick does not include an EXIF
3208 editor so if an EXIF profile is written to the output image, the
3209 value in the EXIF profile might not match the image. It is pos‐
3210 sible for an image file to indicate its orientation in several
3211 different ways simultaneously.
3212
3213 -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
3214 size and location of an image canvas
3215
3216 Use this option to specify the dimensions of the PostScript page
3217 in dots per inch or a TEXT page in pixels. The choices for a
3218 PostScript page are:
3219
3220 11x17 792 1224
3221 Ledger 1224 792
3222 Legal 612 1008
3223 Letter 612 792
3224 LetterSmall 612 792
3225 ArchE 2592 3456
3226 ArchD 1728 2592
3227 ArchC 1296 1728
3228 ArchB 864 1296
3229 ArchA 648 864
3230 A0 2380 3368
3231 A1 1684 2380
3232 A2 1190 1684
3233 A3 842 1190
3234 A4 595 842
3235 A4Small 595 842
3236 A5 421 595
3237 A6 297 421
3238 A7 210 297
3239 A8 148 210
3240 A9 105 148
3241 A10 74 105
3242 B0 2836 4008
3243 B1 2004 2836
3244 B2 1418 2004
3245 B3 1002 1418
3246 B4 709 1002
3247 B5 501 709
3248 C0 2600 3677
3249 C1 1837 2600
3250 C2 1298 1837
3251 C3 918 1298
3252 C4 649 918
3253 C5 459 649
3254 C6 323 459
3255 Flsa 612 936
3256 Flse 612 936
3257 HalfLetter 396 612
3258
3259
3260 For convenience you can specify the page size by media (e.g. A4,
3261 Ledger, etc.). Otherwise, -page behaves much like -geometry
3262 (e.g. -page letter+43+43>).
3263
3264 This option is also used to place subimages when writing to a
3265 multi-image format that supports offsets, such as GIF89 and MNG.
3266 When used for this purpose the offsets are always measured from
3267 the top left corner of the canvas and are not affected by the
3268 -gravity option. To position a GIF or MNG image, use
3269 -page{+-}<x>{+-}<y> (e.g. -page +100+200). When writing to a
3270 MNG file, a -page option appearing ahead of the first image in
3271 the sequence with nonzero width and height defines the width and
3272 height values that are written in the MHDR chunk. Otherwise,
3273 the MNG width and height are computed from the bounding box that
3274 contains all images in the sequence. When writing a GIF89 file,
3275 only the bounding box method is used to determine its dimen‐
3276 sions.
3277
3278 For a PostScript page, the image is sized as in -geometry and
3279 positioned relative to the lower left hand corner of the page by
3280 {+-}<xoffset>{+-}<y offset>. Use -page 612x792>, for example, to
3281 center the image within the page. If the image size exceeds the
3282 PostScript page, it is reduced to fit the page. The default
3283 gravity for the -page option is NorthWest, i.e., positive x and
3284 y offset are measured rightward and downward from the top left
3285 corner of the page, unless the -gravity option is present with a
3286 value other than NorthWest.
3287
3288 The default page dimensions for a TEXT image is 612x792.
3289
3290 This option is used in concert with -density.
3291
3292 Use +page to remove the page settings for an image.
3293
3294 -paint <radius>
3295 simulate an oil painting
3296
3297 Each pixel is replaced by the most frequent color in a circular
3298 neighborhood whose width is specified with radius.
3299
3300 -pause <seconds>
3301 pause between animation loops [animate]
3302
3303 Pause for the specified number of seconds before repeating the
3304 animation.
3305
3306 -pause <seconds>
3307 pause between snapshots [import]
3308
3309 Pause for the specified number of seconds before taking the next
3310 snapshot.
3311
3312 -pen <color>
3313 (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
3314
3315 -ping efficiently determine image characteristics
3316
3317 Use this option to disable reading the image pixels so that
3318 image characteristics such as the image dimensions may be
3319 obtained very quickly. For identify, use +ping to force reading
3320 the image pixels so that the pixel read rate may be included in
3321 the displayed information.
3322
3323 -pointsize <value>
3324 pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
3325
3326 -preview <type>
3327 image preview type
3328
3329 Use this option to affect the preview operation of an image
3330 (e.g. convert file.png -preview Gamma Preview:gamma.png).
3331 Choose from these previews:
3332
3333 Rotate
3334 Shear
3335 Roll
3336 Hue
3337 Saturation
3338 Brightness
3339 Gamma
3340 Spiff
3341 Dull
3342 Grayscale
3343 Quantize
3344 Despeckle
3345 ReduceNoise
3346 AddNoise
3347 Sharpen
3348 Blur
3349 Threshold
3350 EdgeDetect
3351 Spread
3352 Shade
3353 Raise
3354 Segment
3355 Solarize
3356 Swirl
3357 Implode
3358 Wave
3359 OilPaint
3360 CharcoalDrawing
3361 JPEG
3362
3363
3364 The default preview is JPEG.
3365
3366 -process <command>
3367 process a sequence of images using a process module
3368
3369 The command argument has the form module=arg1,arg2,arg3,...,argN
3370 where module is the name of the module to invoke (e.g. "ana‐
3371 lyze") and arg1,arg2,arg3,...,argN are an arbitrary number of
3372 arguments to pass to the process module. The sequence of images
3373 is terminated by the appearance of any option.
3374
3375 If the -process option appears after all of the input images,
3376 all images are processed.
3377
3378 -profile <filename>
3379 add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile to image
3380
3381 -profile filename adds an ICM (ICC color management), IPTC
3382 (newswire information), or a generic (including Exif) profile to
3383 the image
3384
3385 Use +profile icm, +profile iptc, or +profile profile_name to
3386 remove the respective profile. Multiple profiles may be listed,
3387 separated by commas. Profiles may be excluded from subsequent
3388 listed matches by preceding their name with an exclamation
3389 point. For example, +profile '!icm,*' strips all profiles
3390 except for the ICM profile. Use identify -verbose to find out
3391 what profiles are in the image file. Use +profile "*" to remove
3392 all profiles. Writing the image to a format that does not sup‐
3393 port profiles will of course also cause all profiles to be
3394 removed. The JPEG and PNG formats will store any profiles that
3395 have been read and not removed. In JPEG they are stored in APP1
3396 markers, and in PNG they are stored as hex-coded binary in com‐
3397 pressed zTXt chunks, except for the iCC chunk which is stored in
3398 the iCCP chunk.
3399
3400 To extract a profile, the -profile option is not used. Instead,
3401 simply write the file to an image format such as APP1, 8BIM,
3402 ICM, or IPTC.
3403
3404 For example, to extract the Exif data (which is stored in JPEG
3405 files in the APP1 profile), use
3406
3407
3408 gm convert cockatoo.jpg exifdata.app1
3409
3410 Note that GraphicsMagick does not attempt to update any profile
3411 to reflect changes made to the image, e.g., rotation from por‐
3412 trait to landscape orientation, so it is possible that the pre‐
3413 served profile may contain invalid data.
3414
3415 -preserve-timestamp
3416 preserve the original timestamps of the file
3417
3418 Use this option to preserve the original modification and access
3419 timestamps of the file, even if it has been modified.
3420
3421 +progress
3422 disable progress monitor and busy cursor
3423
3424 By default, when an image is displayed, a progress monitor bar
3425 is shown in the top left corner of an existing image display
3426 window, and the current cursor is replaced with an hourglass
3427 cursor. Use +progress to disable the progress monitor and busy
3428 cursor during display operations. While the progress monitor is
3429 disabled for all operations, the busy cursor continues to be
3430 enabled for non-display operations such as image processing.
3431 This option is useful for non-interactive display operations, or
3432 when a "clean" look is desired.
3433
3434 -quality <value>
3435 JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
3436 For the JPEG and MPEG image formats, quality is 0 (lowest image
3437 quality and highest compression) to 100 (best quality but least
3438 effective compression). The default quality is 75. Use the
3439 -sampling-factor option to specify the factors for chroma down‐
3440 sampling. To use the same quality value as that found by the
3441 JPEG decoder, use the -define jpeg:preserve-settings flag.
3442
3443 For the MIFF image format, and the TIFF format while using ZIP
3444 compression, quality/10 is the zlib compression level, which is
3445 0 (worst but fastest compression) to 9 (best but slowest). It
3446 has no effect on the image appearance, since the compression is
3447 always lossless.
3448
3449 For the JPEG-2000 image format, quality is mapped using a non-
3450 linear equation to the compression ratio required by the Jasper
3451 library. This non-linear equation is intended to loosely approx‐
3452 imate the quality provided by the JPEG v1 format. The default
3453 quality value 75 results in a request for 16:1 compression. The
3454 quality value 100 results in a request for non-lossy compres‐
3455 sion.
3456
3457 For the MNG and PNG image formats, the quality value sets the
3458 zlib compression level (quality / 10) and filter-type (quality %
3459 10). Compression levels range from 0 (fastest compression) to
3460 100 (best but slowest). For compression level 0, the Huffman-
3461 only strategy is used, which is fastest but not necessarily the
3462 worst compression.
3463
3464 If filter-type is 4 or less, the specified filter-type is used
3465 for all scanlines:
3466
3467 0: none
3468 1: sub
3469 2: up
3470 3: average
3471 4: Paeth
3472
3473
3474 If filter-type is 5, adaptive filtering is used when quality is
3475 greater than 50 and the image does not have a color map, other‐
3476 wise no filtering is used.
3477
3478 If filter-type is 6, adaptive filtering with minimum-sum-of-
3479 absolute-values is used.
3480
3481 Only if the output is MNG, if filter-type is 7, the LOCO color
3482 transformation and adaptive filtering with minimum-sum-of-abso‐
3483 lute-values are used.
3484
3485 The default is quality is 75, which means nearly the best com‐
3486 pression with adaptive filtering. The quality setting has no
3487 effect on the appearance of PNG and MNG images, since the com‐
3488 pression is always lossless.
3489
3490 For further information, see the PNG specification.
3491
3492 When writing a JNG image with transparency, two quality values
3493 are required, one for the main image and one for the grayscale
3494 image that conveys the opacity channel. These are written as a
3495 single integer equal to the main image quality plus 1000 times
3496 the opacity quality. For example, if you want to use quality 75
3497 for the main image and quality 90 to compress the opacity data,
3498 use -quality 90075.
3499
3500 For the PNM family of formats (PNM, PGM, and PPM) specify a
3501 quality factor of zero in order to obtain the ASCII variant of
3502 the format. Note that -compress none used to be used to trigger
3503 ASCII output but provided the opposite result of what was
3504 expected as compared with other formats.
3505
3506 For the TIFF format, the JPEG, WebP, Zip, and Zstd compression
3507 algorithms are influenced by the quality value. JPEG and WebP
3508 provide lossy compression so higher quality produces a larger
3509 file with less degradation. The Zip and Zstd compression algo‐
3510 rithms (and WebP in lossless mode) are lossless and for these
3511 algorithms a higher ´quality' means to work harder to produce a
3512 smaller file, but with no difference in image quality.
3513
3514 -raise <width>x<height>
3515 lighten or darken image edges
3516
3517 This will create a 3-D effect. See -geometry for details details
3518 about the geometry specification. Offsets are not used.
3519
3520 Use -raise to create a raised effect, otherwise use +raise.
3521
3522 -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
3523 random threshold the image
3524
3525 The channel or channels specified in the <channeltype> argument
3526 are reduced to binary, using an random-threshold method. The
3527 choices for channeltype are All, Intensity, Red, Green, Blue,
3528 Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Opacity
3529
3530 When channeltype is "All", the color samples are thresholded
3531 into a graylevel and then that gray level is stored in the three
3532 color channels. Separately, the opacity channel is thresholded
3533 into a bilevel opacity value which is stored in the opacity
3534 channel. For each pixel, a new random number is used to estab‐
3535 lish the threshold to be used. The threshold never exceeds the
3536 specified maximum (HIGH) and is never less than the specified
3537 minimum (LOW).
3538
3539 When channeltype is "intensity", only the color samples are
3540 thresholded. When channeltype is "opacity" or "matte", only the
3541 opacity channel is thresholded. The other named channels only
3542 threshold the associated channel.
3543
3544 -recolor <matrix>
3545 apply a color translation matrix to image channels
3546
3547 A user supplied color translation matrix (expressed as a text
3548 string) is used to translate/blend the image channels based on
3549 weightings in a supplied matrix which may be of order 3 (color
3550 channels only), 4 (color channels plus opacity), or 5 (color
3551 channels plus opacity and offset). Values in the columns of the
3552 matrix (red, green, blue, opacity) are used as multipliers with
3553 the existing channel values and added together according to the
3554 rows of the matrix. Matrix values are floating point and may be
3555 negative. The offset column (column 5) is purely additive and
3556 is scaled such that 0.0 to 1.0 represents the maximum quantum
3557 range (but values are not limited to this range). The math for
3558 the color translation matrix is similar to that used by Adobe
3559 Flash except that the offset is scaled to 1.0 (divide Flash off‐
3560 set by 255 for use with GraphicsMagick) so that the results are
3561 independent of quantum depth.
3562
3563 An identity matrix exists for each matrix order which results in
3564 no change to the image. The translation matrix should be based
3565 on an alteration of the identity matrix.
3566
3567 Identity matrix of order 3
3568
3569 1 0 0
3570 0 1 0
3571 0 0 1
3572
3573
3574 which may be formatted into a convenient matrix argument similar
3575 to (comma is treated as white space):
3576
3577 -recolor "1 0 0, 0 1 0, 0 0 1"
3578
3579
3580 Identity matrix of order 4
3581
3582 1 0 0 0
3583 0 1 0 0
3584 0 0 1 0
3585 0 0 0 1
3586
3587
3588 Identity matrix of order 5. The last row is required to exist
3589 for the purpose of parsing, but is otherwise not used.
3590
3591 1 0 0 0 0
3592 0 1 0 0 0
3593 0 0 1 0 0
3594 0 0 0 1 0
3595 0 0 0 0 1
3596
3597
3598 As an example, an image wrongly in BGR channel order may be con‐
3599 verted to RGB using this matrix (blue->red, red->blue):
3600
3601 0 0 1
3602 0 1 0
3603 1 0 0
3604
3605
3606 and an RGB image using standard Rec.709 primaries may be con‐
3607 verted to grayscale using this matrix of standard weighting fac‐
3608 tors:
3609
3610 0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3611 0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3612 0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3613
3614
3615 and contrast may be reduced by scaling down by 80% and adding a
3616 10% offset:
3617
3618 0.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1
3619 0.0 0.8 0.0 0.0 0.1
3620 0.0 0.0 0.8 0.0 0.1
3621 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.8 0.1
3622 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0
3623
3624
3625 -red-primary <x>,<y>
3626 red chromaticity primary point
3627
3628 -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
3629 apply options to a portion of the image
3630
3631 The x and y offsets are treated in the same manner as in -crop.
3632
3633 -remote
3634 perform a X11 remote operation
3635
3636 The -remote command sends a command to a "gm display" or "gm
3637 animate" which is already running. The only command recognized
3638 at this time is the name of an image file to load. This capabil‐
3639 ity is very useful to load new images without needing to restart
3640 GraphicsMagick (e.g. for a slide-show or to use GraphicsMagick
3641 as the display engine for a different GUI). Also see the
3642 +progress option for a way to disable progress indication for a
3643 clean look while loading new images.
3644
3645 -render
3646 render vector operations
3647
3648 Use +render to turn off rendering vector operations. This is
3649 useful when saving the result to vector formats such as MVG or
3650 SVG.
3651
3652 -repage <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
3653 Adjust image page offsets
3654
3655 Adjust the current image page canvas and position based on a
3656 relative page specification. This option may be used to change
3657 the location of a subframe (e.g. part of an animation) prior to
3658 composition. If the geometry specification is absolute
3659 (includes a '!'), then the offset adjustment is absolute and
3660 there is no adjustment to page width and height, otherwise the
3661 page width and height values are also adjusted based on the cur‐
3662 rent image dimensions. Use +repage to set the image page off‐
3663 sets to default.
3664
3665 -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
3666 Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
3667
3668 Resize the image so that its rendered size remains the same as
3669 the original at the specified target resolution. Either the cur‐
3670 rent image resolution units or the previously set with -units
3671 are used to interpret the argument. For example, if a 300 DPI
3672 image renders at 3 inches by 2 inches on a 300 DPI device, when
3673 the image has been resampled to 72 DPI, it will render at 3
3674 inches by 2 inches on a 72 DPI device. Note that only a small
3675 number of image formats (e.g. JPEG, PNG, and TIFF) are capable
3676 of storing the image resolution. For formats which do not sup‐
3677 port an image resolution, the original resolution of the image
3678 must be specified via -density on the command line prior to
3679 specifying the resample resolution.
3680
3681 Note that Photoshop stores and obtains image resolution from a
3682 proprietary embedded profile. If this profile exists in the
3683 image, then Photoshop will continue to treat the image using its
3684 former resolution, ignoring the image resolution specified in
3685 the standard file header.
3686
3687 Some image formats (e.g. PNG) require use of metric or english
3688 units so even if the original image used a particular unit sys‐
3689 tem, if it is saved to a different format prior to resampling,
3690 then it may be necessary to specify the desired resolution units
3691 using -units since the original units may have been lost. In
3692 other words, do not assume that the resolution units are
3693 restored if the image has been saved to a file.
3694
3695 -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
3696 resize an image
3697
3698 This is an alias for the -geometry option and it behaves in the
3699 same manner. If the -filter option precedes the -resize option,
3700 the specified filter is used.
3701
3702 There are some exceptions:
3703
3704 When used as a composite option, -resize conveys the preferred
3705 size of the output image, while -geometry conveys the size and
3706 placement of the composite image within the main image.
3707
3708 When used as a montage option, -resize conveys the preferred
3709 size of the montage, while -geometry conveys information about
3710 the tiles.
3711
3712 -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
3713 roll an image vertically or horizontally
3714
3715 See -geometry for details the geometry specification. The x and
3716 y offsets are not affected by the -gravity option.
3717
3718 A negative x offset rolls the image left-to-right. A negative y
3719 offset rolls the image top-to-bottom.
3720
3721 -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
3722 rotate the image
3723
3724 Positive angles rotate the image in a clockwise direction while
3725 negative angles rotate counter-clockwise.
3726
3727 Use > to rotate the image only if its width exceeds the height.
3728 < rotates the image only if its width is less than the height.
3729 For example, if you specify -rotate "-90>" and the image size is
3730 480x640, the image is not rotated. However, if the image is
3731 640x480, it is rotated by -90 degrees. If you use > or <,
3732 enclose it in quotation marks to prevent it from being misinter‐
3733 preted as a file redirection.
3734
3735 Empty triangles left over from rotating the image are filled
3736 with the color defined as background (class backgroundColor).
3737 The color is specified using the format described under the
3738 -fill option.
3739
3740 -sample <geometry>
3741 scale image using pixel sampling
3742
3743 See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
3744 -sample ignores the -filter selection if the -filter option is
3745 present. Offsets, if present in the geometry string, are
3746 ignored, and the -gravity option has no effect.
3747
3748 -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
3749 chroma subsampling factors
3750
3751 This option specifies the sampling factors to be used by the
3752 DPX, JPEG, MPEG, or YUV encoders for chroma downsampling. The
3753 sampling factor must be specified while reading the raw YUV for‐
3754 mat since it is not preserved in the file header. Industry-
3755 standard video subsampling notation such as "4:2:2" may also be
3756 used to specify the sampling factors. "4:2:2" is equivalent to a
3757 specification of "2x1"
3758
3759 The JPEG decoder obtains the original sampling factors (and
3760 quality settings) when a JPEG file is read. To re-use the origi‐
3761 nal sampling factors (and quality setting) when JPEG is output,
3762 use the -define jpeg:preserve-settings flag.
3763
3764 -scale <geometry>
3765 scale the image.
3766
3767 See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
3768 -scale uses a simpler, faster algorithm, and it ignores the
3769 -filter selection if the -filter option is present. Offsets, if
3770 present in the geometry string, are ignored, and the -gravity
3771 option has no effect.
3772
3773 -scene <value>
3774 set scene number
3775
3776 This option sets the scene number of an image or the first image
3777 in an image sequence.
3778
3779 -scenes <value-value>
3780 range of image scene numbers to read
3781
3782 Each image in the range is read with the filename followed by a
3783 period (.) and the decimal scene number. You can change this
3784 behavior by embedding a %d, %0Nd, %o, %0No, %x, or %0Nx printf
3785 format specification in the file name. For example,
3786
3787 gm montage -scenes 5-7 image.miff montage.miff
3788
3789
3790 makes a montage of files image.miff.5, image.miff.6, and
3791 image.miff.7, and
3792
3793 gm animate -scenes 0-12 image%02d.miff
3794
3795
3796 animates files image00.miff, image01.miff, through image12.miff.
3797
3798 -screen
3799 specify the screen to capture
3800
3801 This option indicates that the GetImage request used to obtain
3802 the image should be done on the root window, rather than
3803 directly on the specified window. In this way, you can obtain
3804 pieces of other windows that overlap the specified window, and
3805 more importantly, you can capture menus or other popups that are
3806 independent windows but appear over the specified window.
3807
3808 -set <attribute> <value>
3809 set an image attribute
3810
3811 Set a named image attribute. The attribute is set on the cur‐
3812 rent (previously specified on command line) image.
3813
3814 +set <attribute>
3815 unset an image attribute
3816
3817 Unset a named image attribute. The attribute is removed from
3818 the current (previously specified on command line) image.
3819
3820 -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
3821 segment an image
3822
3823 Segment an image by analyzing the histograms of the color compo‐
3824 nents and identifying units that are homogeneous with the fuzzy
3825 c-means technique.
3826
3827 Segmentation is a very useful fast and and approximate color
3828 quantization algorithm for scanned printed pages or scanned car‐
3829 toons. It may also be used as a special effect. Specify cluster
3830 threshold as the minimum percentage of total pixels in a cluster
3831 before it is considered valid. For huge images containing small
3832 detail, this may need to be a tiny fraction of a percent (e.g.
3833 0.015) so that important detail is not lost. Smoothing thresh‐
3834 old eliminates noise in the second derivative of the histogram.
3835 As the value is increased, you can expect a smoother second de‐
3836 rivative. The default is 1.5. Add the -verbose option to see a
3837 dump of cluster statistics given the parameters used. The sta‐
3838 tistics may be used as a guide to help fine tune the options.
3839
3840 -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
3841 shade the image using a distant light source
3842
3843 Specify azimuth and elevation as the position of the light
3844 source. Use +shade to return the shading results as a grayscale
3845 image.
3846
3847 -shadow <radius>{x<sigma>}
3848 shadow the montage
3849
3850 -shared-memory
3851 use shared memory
3852
3853 This option specifies whether the utility should attempt to use
3854 shared memory for pixmaps. GraphicsMagick must be compiled with
3855 shared memory support, and the display must support the MIT-SHM
3856 extension. Otherwise, this option is ignored. The default is
3857 True.
3858
3859 -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
3860 sharpen the image
3861
3862 Use a Gaussian operator of the given radius and standard devia‐
3863 tion (sigma).
3864
3865 -shave <width>x<height>{%}
3866 shave pixels from the image edges
3867
3868 Specify the width of the region to be removed from both sides of
3869 the image and the height of the regions to be removed from top
3870 and bottom.
3871
3872 -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
3873 shear the image along the X or Y axis
3874
3875 Use the specified positive or negative shear angle.
3876
3877 Shearing slides one edge of an image along the X or Y axis, cre‐
3878 ating a parallelogram. An X direction shear slides an edge along
3879 the X axis, while a Y direction shear slides an edge along the Y
3880 axis. The amount of the shear is controlled by a shear angle.
3881 For X direction shears, x degrees is measured relative to the Y
3882 axis, and similarly, for Y direction shears y degrees is mea‐
3883 sured relative to the X axis.
3884
3885 Empty triangles left over from shearing the image are filled
3886 with the color defined as background (class backgroundColor).
3887 The color is specified using the format described under the
3888 -fill option.
3889
3890 -silent
3891 operate silently
3892
3893 -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
3894 width and height of the image
3895
3896 Use this option to specify the width and height of raw images
3897 whose dimensions are unknown such as GRAY, RGB, or CMYK. In
3898 addition to width and height, use -size with an offset to skip
3899 any header information in the image or tell the number of colors
3900 in a MAP image file, (e.g. -size 640x512+256).
3901
3902 For Photo CD images, choose from these sizes:
3903
3904 192x128
3905 384x256
3906 768x512
3907 1536x1024
3908 3072x2048
3909
3910
3911 Finally, use this option to choose a particular resolution layer
3912 of a JBIG or JPEG image (e.g. -size 1024x768).
3913
3914 -snaps <value>
3915 number of screen snapshots
3916
3917 Use this option to grab more than one image from the X server
3918 screen, to create an animation sequence.
3919
3920 -solarize <factor>
3921 negate all pixels above the threshold level
3922
3923 Specify factor as the percent threshold of the intensity (0 -
3924 99.9%).
3925
3926 This option produces a solarization effect seen when exposing a
3927 photographic film to light during the development process.
3928
3929 -spread <amount>
3930 displace image pixels by a random amount
3931
3932 Amount defines the size of the neighborhood around each pixel to
3933 choose a candidate pixel to swap.
3934
3935 -stegano <offset>
3936 hide watermark within an image
3937
3938 Use an offset to start the image hiding some number of pixels
3939 from the beginning of the image. Note this offset and the image
3940 size. You will need this information to recover the stegano‐
3941 graphic image (e.g. display -size 320x256+35 stegano:image.png).
3942
3943 -stereo
3944 composite two images to create a stereo anaglyph
3945
3946 The left side of the stereo pair is saved as the red channel of
3947 the output image. The right side is saved as the green channel.
3948 Red-green stereo glasses are required to properly view the
3949 stereo image.
3950
3951 -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
3952
3953 All embedded profiles and text attributes are stripped from the
3954 image. This is useful for images used for the web, or when out‐
3955 put files need to be as small as possible
3956
3957 Be careful not to use this option to remove author, copyright,
3958 and license information that you are required to retain when
3959 redistributing an image.
3960
3961 -stroke <color>
3962 color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
3963
3964 The color is specified using the format described under the
3965 -fill option.
3966
3967 See -draw for further details.
3968
3969 -strokewidth <value>
3970 set the stroke width
3971
3972 See -draw for further details.
3973
3974 -swirl <degrees>
3975 swirl image pixels about the center
3976
3977 Degrees defines the tightness of the swirl.
3978
3979 -text-font <name>
3980 font for writing fixed-width text
3981
3982 Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in fixed (type‐
3983 writer style) formatted text. The default is 14 point Courier.
3984
3985 You can tag a font to specify whether it is a PostScript, True‐
3986 Type, or X11 font. For example, Courier.ttf is a TrueType font
3987 and x:fixed is X11.
3988
3989 -texture <filename>
3990 name of texture to tile onto the image background
3991
3992 -threshold <value>{%}
3993 threshold the image
3994
3995 Modify the image such that any pixel sample with an intensity
3996 value greater than the threshold is assigned the maximum inten‐
3997 sity (white), or otherwise is assigned the minimum intensity
3998 (black). If a percent prefix is applied, then the threshold is a
3999 percentage of the available range.
4000
4001 To efficiently create a black and white image from a color
4002 image, use
4003
4004 gm convert -threshold 50% in.png out.png
4005
4006
4007 The optimum threshold value depends on the nature of the image.
4008 In order to threshold individual channels, use the -operator
4009 subcommand with it's Threshold, Threshold-White, or Threshold-
4010 Black options.
4011
4012 -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
4013 resize an image (quickly)
4014
4015 The -thumbnail command resizes the image as quickly as possible,
4016 with more concern for speed than resulting image quality.
4017 Regardless, resulting image quality should be acceptable for
4018 many uses. It is primarily intended to be used to generate
4019 smaller versions of the image, but may also be used to enlarge
4020 the image. The -thumbnail geometry argument observes the same
4021 syntax and rules as it does for -resize.
4022
4023 -tile <filename>
4024 tile image when filling a graphic primitive
4025
4026 -tile <geometry>
4027 layout of images [montage]
4028
4029 -title <string>
4030 assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
4031
4032 Use this option to assign a specific title to the image. This is
4033 assigned to the image window and is typically displayed in the
4034 window title bar. Optionally you can include the image file‐
4035 name, type, width, height, Exif data, or other image attribute
4036 by embedding special format characters described under the -for‐
4037 mat option.
4038
4039 For example,
4040
4041 -title "%m:%f %wx%h"
4042
4043
4044 produces an image title of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
4045 titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
4046
4047 -transform
4048 transform the image
4049
4050 This option applies the transformation matrix from a previous
4051 -affine option.
4052
4053 gm convert -affine 2,2,-2,2,0,0 -transform bird.ppm bird.jpg
4054
4055
4056 -transparent <color>
4057 make this color transparent within the image
4058
4059 The color is specified using the format described under the
4060 -fill option.
4061
4062 -treedepth <value>
4063 tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
4064
4065 Normally, this integer value is zero or one. A value of zero or
4066 one causes the use of an optimal tree depth for the color reduc‐
4067 tion algorithm
4068
4069 An optimal depth generally allows the best representation of the
4070 source image with the fastest computational speed and the least
4071 amount of memory. However, the default depth is inappropriate
4072 for some images. To assure the best representation, try values
4073 between 2 and 8 for this parameter. Refer to quantize for more
4074 details.
4075
4076 The -colors or -monochrome option, or writing to an image format
4077 which requires color reduction, is required for this option to
4078 take effect.
4079
4080 -trim trim an image
4081
4082 This option removes any edges that are exactly the same color as
4083 the corner pixels. Use -fuzz to make -trim remove edges that
4084 are nearly the same color as the corner pixels.
4085
4086 -type <type>
4087 the image type
4088
4089 Choose from: Bilevel, Grayscale, Palette, PaletteMatte, True‐
4090 Color, TrueColorMatte, ColorSeparation, ColorSeparationMatte, or
4091 Optimize.
4092
4093 Normally, when a format supports different subformats such as
4094 bilevel, grayscale, palette, truecolor, and truecolor+alpha, the
4095 encoder will try to choose a suitable subformat based on the
4096 nature of the image. The -type option may be used to tailor the
4097 output subformat. By default the output subformat is based on
4098 readily available image information and is usually similar to
4099 the input format.
4100
4101 Specify -type Optimize in order to enable inspecting all pixels
4102 (if necessary) in order to find the most efficient subformat.
4103 Inspecting all of the pixels may be slow for very large images,
4104 particularly if they are stored in a disk cache. If an RGB image
4105 contains only gray pixels, then every pixel in the image must be
4106 inspected in order to decide that the image is actually
4107 grayscale!
4108
4109 Sometimes a specific subformat is desired. For example, to force
4110 a JPEG image to be written in TrueColor RGB format even though
4111 only gray pixels are present, use
4112
4113 gm convert bird.pgm -type TrueColor bird.jpg
4114
4115
4116 Similarly, using -type TrueColorMatte will force the encoder to
4117 write an alpha channel even though the image is opaque, if the
4118 output format supports transparency.
4119
4120 Some pseudo-formats (e.g. the XC format) will respect the
4121 requested type if it occurs previously on the command line. For
4122 example, to obtain a DirectClass solid color canvas image rather
4123 than PsuedoClass, use
4124
4125 gm convert -size 640x480 -type TrueColor xc:red red.miff
4126
4127
4128 Likewise, specify -type Bilevel, Grayscale, TrueColor, or True‐
4129 ColorMatte prior to reading a Postscript (or PDF file) in order
4130 to influence the type of image that Ghostcript returns. Reading
4131 performance will be dramatically improved for black/white Post‐
4132 script if Bilevel is specified, and will be considerably faster
4133 if Grayscale is specified.
4134
4135 -update <seconds>
4136 detect when image file is modified and redisplay.
4137
4138 Suppose that while you are displaying an image the file that is
4139 currently displayed is over-written. display will automatically
4140 detect that the input file has been changed and update the dis‐
4141 played image accordingly.
4142
4143 -units <type>
4144 the units of image resolution
4145
4146 Choose from: Undefined, PixelsPerInch, or PixelsPerCentimeter.
4147 This option is normally used in conjunction with the -density
4148 option.
4149
4150 -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
4151 sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
4152
4153 The -unsharp option sharpens an image. The image is convolved
4154 with a Gaussian operator of the given radius and standard devia‐
4155 tion (sigma). For reasonable results, radius should be larger
4156 than sigma. Use a radius of 0 to have the method select a suit‐
4157 able radius.
4158
4159 The parameters are:
4160
4161
4162 radius
4163
4164
4165 The radius of the Gaussian, in pixels, not counting the
4166 center pixel (default 0).
4167
4168 sigma
4169
4170
4171 The standard deviation of the Gaussian, in pixels (default
4172 1.0).
4173
4174 amount
4175
4176
4177 The percentage of the difference between the original and
4178 the blur image that is added back into the original
4179 (default 1.0).
4180
4181 threshold
4182
4183
4184 The threshold, as a fraction of MaxRGB, needed to apply
4185 the difference amount (default 0.05).
4186
4187
4188
4189
4190 -use-pixmap
4191 use the pixmap
4192
4193 -verbose
4194 print detailed information about the image
4195
4196 This information is printed: image scene number; image name;
4197 image size; the image class (DirectClass or PseudoClass); the
4198 total number of unique colors; and the number of seconds to read
4199 and transform the image. If the image is DirectClass, the total
4200 number of unique colors is not displayed unless -verbose is
4201 specified twice since it may take quite a long time to compute,
4202 particularly for deep images. If the image is PseudoClass then
4203 its pixels are defined by indexes into a colormap. If the image
4204 is DirectClass then each pixel includes a complete and indepen‐
4205 dent color specification.
4206
4207 If -colors is also specified, the total unique colors in the
4208 image and color reduction error values are printed. Refer to
4209 quantize for a description of these values.
4210
4211 -version
4212 print GraphicsMagick version string
4213
4214 -view <string>
4215 FlashPix viewing parameters
4216
4217 -virtual-pixel <method>
4218 specify contents of "virtual pixels"
4219
4220 This option defines "virtual pixels" for use in operations that
4221 can access pixels outside the boundaries of an image.
4222
4223 Choose from these methods:
4224
4225
4226 Constant
4227
4228
4229 Use the image background color.
4230
4231 Edge
4232
4233
4234 Extend the edge pixel toward infinity (default).
4235
4236 Mirror
4237
4238
4239 Mirror the image.
4240
4241 Tile
4242
4243
4244 Tile the image.
4245
4246
4247
4248
4249 This option affects operations that use virtual pixels such as
4250 -blur, -sharpen, -wave, etc.
4251
4252 -visual <type>
4253 animate images using this X visual type
4254
4255 Choose from these visual classes:
4256
4257 StaticGray
4258 GrayScale
4259 StaticColor
4260 PseudoColor
4261 TrueColor
4262 DirectColor
4263 default
4264 visual id
4265
4266
4267 The X server must support the visual you choose, otherwise an
4268 error occurs. If a visual is not specified, the visual class
4269 that can display the most simultaneous colors on the default
4270 screen is chosen.
4271
4272 -watermark <brightness>x<saturation>
4273 percent brightness and saturation of a watermark
4274
4275 -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
4276 alter an image along a sine wave
4277
4278 Specify amplitude and wavelength of the wave.
4279
4280 -white-point <x>,<y>
4281 chromaticity white point
4282
4283 -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
4284 pixels above the threshold become white
4285
4286 Use -white-threshold to set pixels with values above the speci‐
4287 fied threshold to maximum value (white). If only one value is
4288 supplied, or the red, green, and blue values are identical, then
4289 intensity thresholding is used. If the color threshold values
4290 are not identical then channel-based thresholding is used, and
4291 color distortion will occur. Specify a negative value (e.g. -1)
4292 if you want a channel to be ignored but you do want to threshold
4293 a channel later in the list. If a percent (%) symbol is
4294 appended, then the values are treated as a percentage of maximum
4295 range.
4296
4297 -window <id>
4298 make image the background of a window
4299
4300 id can be a window id or name. Specify root to select X's root
4301 window as the target window.
4302
4303 By default the image is tiled onto the background of the target
4304 window. If backdrop or -geometry are specified, the image is
4305 surrounded by the background color. Refer to X RESOURCES for
4306 details.
4307
4308 The image will not display on the root window if the image has
4309 more unique colors than the target window colormap allows. Use
4310 -colors to reduce the number of colors.
4311
4312 -window-group
4313 specify the window group
4314
4315 -write <filename>
4316 write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
4317
4318 The current image is written to the specified filename and then
4319 processing continues using that image. The following is an exam‐
4320 ple of how several sizes of an image may be generated in one
4321 command (repeat as often as needed):
4322
4323 gm convert input.jpg -resize 50% -write input50.jpg \
4324 -resize 25% input25.jpg
4325
4326
4327 -write <filename>
4328 write the image to a file [display]
4329
4330 If filename already exists, you will be prompted as to whether
4331 it should be overwritten.
4332
4333 By default, the image is written in the format that it was read
4334 in as. To specify a particular image format, prefix filename
4335 with the image type and a colon (e.g., ps:image) or specify the
4336 image type as the filename suffix (e.g., image.ps). Specify file
4337 as - for standard output. If file has the extension .Z or .gz,
4338 the file size is compressed using compress or gzip respectively.
4339 Precede the image file name with | to pipe to a system command.
4340
4341 Use -compress to specify the type of image compression.
4342
4343 The equivalent X resource for this option is writeFilename
4344 (class WriteFilename). See "X Resources", below, for details.
4345
4347 COLUMNS
4348 Output screen width. Used when formatting text for the screen.
4349 Many Unix systems keep this shell variable up to date, but it
4350 may need to be explicitly exported in order for GraphicsMagick
4351 to see it.
4352
4353 DISPLAY
4354 X11 display ID (host, display number, and screen in the form
4355 hostname:display.screen).
4356
4357 HOME Location of user's home directory. For security reasons, now
4358 only observed by "uninstalled" builds of GraphicsMagick which do
4359 not have their location hard-coded or set by an installer. When
4360 supported, GraphicsMagick searches for configuration files in
4361 $HOME/.magick if the directory exists. See MAGICK_CODER_MOD‐
4362 ULE_PATH, MAGICK_CONFIGURE_PATH, and MAGICK_FILTER_MODULE_PATH
4363 if more flexibility is needed.
4364
4365 MAGICK_ACCESS_MONITOR
4366 When set to TRUE, command line monitor mode (enabled by -moni‐
4367 tor) will also show files accessed (including temporary files)
4368 and any external commands which are executed. This is useful for
4369 debugging, but also illustrates arguments made available to an
4370 access handler registered by the MagickSetConfirmAccessHandler()
4371 C library function.
4372
4373 MAGICK_CODER_STABILITY
4374 The minimum coder stability level before it will be used. The
4375 available levels are PRIMARY, STABLE, UNSTABLE, and BROKEN. The
4376 default minimum level is UNSTABLE, which means that all avail‐
4377 able working coders will be used. The purpose of this option is
4378 to reduce the security exposure (or apparent complexity) due to
4379 the huge number of formats supported. Coders at the PRIMARY
4380 level are commonly used formats with very well maintained imple‐
4381 mentations. Coders at the STABLE level are reasonably well main‐
4382 tained but represent less used formats. Coders at the UNSTABLE
4383 level either have weak implementations, the file format itself
4384 is weak, or the probability the coder will be needed is vanish‐
4385 ingly small. Coders at the BROKEN level are known to often not
4386 work properly or might not be useful in their current state at
4387 all.
4388
4389 MAGICK_CODER_MODULE_PATH
4390 Search path to use when searching for image format coder mod‐
4391 ules. This path allows the user to arbitrarily extend the image
4392 formats supported by GraphicsMagick by adding loadable modules
4393 to an arbitrary location rather than copying them into the
4394 GraphicsMagick installation directory. The formatting of the
4395 search path is similar to operating system search paths (i.e.
4396 colon delimited for Unix, and semi-colon delimited for Microsoft
4397 Windows). This user specified search path is used before trying
4398 the default search path.
4399
4400 MAGICK_CONFIGURE_PATH
4401 Search path to use when searching for configuration (.mgk)
4402 files. The formatting of the search path is similar to operat‐
4403 ing system search paths (i.e. colon delimited for Unix, and
4404 semi-colon delimited for Microsoft Windows). This user specified
4405 search path is used before trying the default search path.
4406
4407 MAGICK_DEBUG
4408 Debug options (see -debug for details). Setting the configure
4409 debug option via an environment variable (e.g. MAGICK_DEBUG=con‐
4410 figure) is necessary to see the complete initialization process,
4411 which includes searching for configuration files.
4412
4413 MAGICK_FILTER_MODULE_PATH
4414 Search path to use when searching for filter process modules
4415 (invoked via -process). This path allows the user to arbitrarily
4416 extend GraphicsMagick's image processing functionality by adding
4417 loadable modules to an arbitrary location rather than copying
4418 them into the GraphicsMagick installation directory. The format‐
4419 ting of the search path is similar to operating system search
4420 paths (i.e. colon delimited for Unix, and semi-colon delimited
4421 for Microsoft Windows). This user specified search path is used
4422 before trying the default search path.
4423
4424 MAGICK_GHOSTSCRIPT_PATH
4425 For Microsoft Windows, specify the path to the Ghostscript
4426 installation rather than searching for it via the Windows reg‐
4427 istry. This helps in case Ghostscript is not installed via the
4428 Ghostscript Windows installer or the user wants more control
4429 over the Ghostscript used.
4430
4431 MAGICK_HOME
4432 Path to top of GraphicsMagick installation directory. Only
4433 observed by "uninstalled" builds of GraphicsMagick which do not
4434 have their location hard-coded or set by an installer.
4435
4436 MAGICK_MMAP_READ
4437 If MAGICK_MMAP_READ is set to TRUE, GraphicsMagick will attempt
4438 to memory-map the input file for reading. This usually substan‐
4439 tially improves repeated read performance since the file is
4440 already in memory after the first time it has been read. How‐
4441 ever, testing shows that performance may be reduced for files
4442 accessed for the first time since data is accessed via page-
4443 faults (upon first access) and many operating systems fail to do
4444 sequential read-ahead of memory mapped files, and particularly
4445 if those files are accessed over a network. If many large input
4446 files are read, then enabling this option may harm performance
4447 by overloading the operating system's VM system as it then needs
4448 to free unmapped pages and map new ones.
4449
4450 MAGICK_IO_FSYNC
4451 If MAGICK_IO_FSYNC is set to TRUE, then GraphicsMagick will
4452 request that the output file is fully flushed and synchronized
4453 to disk when it is closed. This incurs a performance penalty,
4454 but has the benefit that if the power fails or the system
4455 crashes, the file should be valid on disk. If image files are
4456 referenced from a database, then this option helps assure that
4457 the files referenced by the database are valid.
4458
4459 MAGICK_IOBUF_SIZE
4460 The amount of I/O buffering (in bytes) to use when reading and
4461 writing encoded files. The default is 16384, which is observed
4462 to work well for many cases. The best value for a local filesys‐
4463 tem is usually the the native filesystem block size (e.g. 4096,
4464 8192, or even 131,072 for ZFS) in order to minimize the number
4465 of physical disk I/O operations. I/O performance to files
4466 accessed over a network may benefit significantly by tuning this
4467 option. Larger values are not necessarily better (they may be
4468 slower!), and there is rarely any benefit from using values
4469 larger than 32768. Use convert's -verbose option in order to
4470 evaluate read and write rates in pixels per second while keeping
4471 in mind that the operating system will try to cache files in
4472 RAM.
4473
4474 MAGICK_LIMIT_DISK
4475 Maximum amount of disk space allowed for use by the pixel cache.
4476
4477 MAGICK_LIMIT_FILES
4478 Maximum number of open files.
4479
4480 MAGICK_LIMIT_MAP
4481 Maximum size of a memory mapped file allocation. A memory
4482 mapped file consumes memory when the file is accessed, although
4483 the system may reclaim such memory when needed.
4484
4485 MAGICK_LIMIT_MEMORY
4486 Maximum amount of memory to allocate from the heap.
4487
4488 MAGICK_LIMIT_PIXELS
4489 Maximum number of total pixels (image rows times image colums)
4490 to allow for any image which is requested to be created or read.
4491 This is useful to place a limit on how large an image may be.
4492 If the input image file has image dimensions larger than the
4493 pixel limit, then the image memory allocation is denied and an
4494 error is returned immediately. This is a per-image limit and
4495 does not limit the total number of pixels due to multiple image
4496 frames/pages (e.g. multi-page document or an animation).
4497
4498 MAGICK_LIMIT_WIDTH
4499 Maximum pixel width of an image read, or created.
4500
4501 MAGICK_LIMIT_HEIGHT
4502 Maximum pixel height of an image read, or created.
4503
4504 MAGICK_TMPDIR
4505 Path to directory where GraphicsMagick should write temporary
4506 files. The default is to use the system default, or the location
4507 set by TMPDIR.
4508
4509 TMPDIR For POSIX-compatible systems (Unix-compatible), the path to the
4510 directory where all applications should write temporary files.
4511 Overridden by MAGICK_TMPDIR if it is set.
4512
4513 TMP or TEMP
4514 For Microsoft Windows, the path to the directory where applica‐
4515 tions should write temporary files. Overridden by MAGICK_TMPDIR
4516 if it is set.
4517
4518 OMP_NUM_THREADS
4519 As per the OpenMP standard, this specifies the number of threads
4520 to use in parallel regions. Some compilers default the number of
4521 threads to use to the number of processor cores available while
4522 others default to just one thread. See the OpenMP specification
4523 for other standard adjustments and your compiler's manual for
4524 vendor-specific settings.
4525
4527 GraphicsMagick uses a number of XML format configuration files:
4528
4529 colors.mgk
4530 colors configuration file
4531
4532 <?xml version="1.0"?>
4533 <colormap>
4534 <color name="AliceBlue" red="240" green="248" blue="255"
4535 compliance="SVG, X11, XPM" />
4536 </colormap>
4537
4538
4539 delegates.mgk
4540 delegates configuration file
4541
4542 log.mgk
4543 logging configuration file
4544
4545 <?xml version="1.0"?>
4546 <magicklog>
4547 <log events="None" />
4548 <log output="stdout" />
4549 <log filename="Magick-%d.log" />
4550 <log generations="3" />
4551 <log limit="2000" />
4552 <log format="%t %r %u %p %m/%f/%l/%d:\n %e" />
4553 </magicklog>
4554
4555
4556 modules.mgk
4557 loadable modules configuration file
4558
4559 <?xml version="1.0"?>
4560 <modulemap>
4561 <module magick="8BIM" name="META" />
4562 </modulemap>
4563
4564
4565 type.mgk
4566 master type (fonts) configuration file
4567
4568 <?xml version="1.0"?>
4569 <typemap>
4570 <include file="type-windows.mgk" />
4571 <type
4572 name="AvantGarde-Book"
4573 fullname="AvantGarde Book"
4574 family="AvantGarde"
4575 foundry="URW"
4576 weight="400"
4577 style="normal"
4578 stretch="normal"
4579 format="type1"
4580 metrics="/usr/local/share/ghostscript/fonts/a010013l.afm"
4581 glyphs="/usr/local/share/ghostscript/fonts/a010013l.pfb"
4582 />
4583 </typemap>
4584
4585
4587 Animate displays a sequence of images on any workstation display run‐
4588 ning an X server. animate first determines the hardware capabilities of
4589 the workstation. If the number of unique colors in an image is less
4590 than or equal to the number the workstation can support, the image is
4591 displayed in an X window. Otherwise the number of colors in the image
4592 is first reduced to match the color resolution of the workstation
4593 before it is displayed.
4594
4595 This means that a continuous-tone 24 bits-per-pixel image can display
4596 on a 8 bit pseudo-color device or monochrome device. In most instances
4597 the reduced color image closely resembles the original. Alternatively,
4598 a monochrome or pseudo-color image sequence can display on a continu‐
4599 ous-tone 24 bits-per-pixel device.
4600
4601 To help prevent color flashing on X server visuals that have colormaps,
4602 animate creates a single colormap from the image sequence. This can be
4603 rather time consuming. You can speed this operation up by reducing the
4604 colors in the image before you "animate" them. Use mogrify to color
4605 reduce the images to a single colormap. See mogrify(1) for details.
4606 Alternatively, you can use a Standard Colormap; or a static, direct, or
4607 true color visual. You can define a Standard Colormap with xstdcmap.
4608 See xstdcmap(1) for details. This method is recommended for colormapped
4609 X server because it eliminates the need to compute a global colormap.
4610
4612 To animate a set of images of a cockatoo, use:
4613
4614 gm animate cockatoo.*
4615
4616
4617 To animate a cockatoo image sequence while using the Standard Colormap
4618 best, use:
4619
4620 xstdcmap -best
4621 gm animate -map best cockatoo.*
4622
4623
4624 To animate an image of a cockatoo without a border centered on a back‐
4625 drop, use:
4626
4627
4628 gm animate +borderwidth -backdrop cockatoo.*
4629
4630
4632 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
4633
4634
4635 -authenticate <string>
4636 decrypt image with this password
4637
4638 -backdrop
4639 display the image centered on a backdrop.
4640
4641 -background <color>
4642 the background color
4643
4644 -bordercolor <color>
4645 the border color
4646
4647 -borderwidth <geometry>
4648 the border width
4649
4650 -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
4651 remove pixels from the interior of an image
4652
4653 -colormap <type>
4654 define the colormap type
4655
4656 -colors <value>
4657 preferred number of colors in the image
4658
4659 -colorspace <value>
4660 the type of colorspace
4661
4662 -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
4663 preferred size and location of the cropped image
4664
4665 -debug <events>
4666 enable debug printout
4667
4668 -define <key>{=<value>},...
4669 add coder/decoder specific options
4670
4671 -delay <1/100ths of a second>
4672 display the next image after pausing
4673
4674 -density <width>x<height>
4675 horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
4676
4677 -depth <value>
4678 depth of the image
4679
4680 -display <host:display[.screen]>
4681 specifies the X server to contact
4682
4683 -dispose <method>
4684 GIF disposal method
4685
4686 -dither
4687 apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
4688
4689 -font <name>
4690 use this font when annotating the image with text
4691
4692 -foreground <color>
4693 define the foreground color
4694
4695 -gamma <value>
4696 level of gamma correction
4697
4698 -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
4699 Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
4700
4701 -help print usage instructions
4702
4703 -iconGeometry <geometry>
4704 specify the icon geometry
4705
4706 -iconic
4707 iconic animation
4708
4709 -interlace <type>
4710 the type of interlacing scheme
4711
4712 -limit <type> <value>
4713 Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height or Threads
4714 resource limit
4715
4716 -log <string>
4717 Specify format for debug log
4718
4719 -map <type>
4720 display image using this type.
4721
4722 -matte store matte channel if the image has one
4723
4724 -mattecolor <color>
4725 specify the color to be used with the -frame option
4726
4727 -monitor
4728 show progress indication
4729
4730 -monochrome
4731 transform the image to black and white
4732
4733 -name name an image
4734
4735 -noop NOOP (no option)
4736
4737 -pause <seconds>
4738 pause between animation loops [animate]
4739
4740 -remote
4741 perform a X11 remote operation
4742
4743 -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
4744 rotate the image
4745
4746 -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
4747 chroma subsampling factors
4748
4749 -scenes <value-value>
4750 range of image scene numbers to read
4751
4752 -shared-memory
4753 use shared memory
4754
4755 -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
4756 width and height of the image
4757
4758 -text-font <name>
4759 font for writing fixed-width text
4760
4761 -title <string>
4762 assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
4763
4764 -treedepth <value>
4765 tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
4766
4767 -trim trim an image
4768
4769 -type <type>
4770 the image type
4771
4772 -verbose
4773 print detailed information about the image
4774
4775 -version
4776 print GraphicsMagick version string
4777
4778 -visual <type>
4779 animate images using this X visual type
4780
4781 -window <id>
4782 make image the background of a window
4783
4784 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options,
4785 above.
4786
4787
4788 Any option you specify on the command line remains in effect for
4789 the group of images following it, until the group is terminated
4790 by the appearance of any option or -noop. For example, to ani‐
4791 mate three images, the first with 32 colors, the second with an
4792 unlimited number of colors, and the third with only 16 colors,
4793 use:
4794
4795
4796 gm animate -colors 32 cockatoo.1 -noop cockatoo.2
4797 -colors 16 cockatoo.3
4798
4799
4800 Animate options can appear on the command line or in your X
4801 resources file. See X(1). Options on the command line supersede
4802 values specified in your X resources file. Image filenames may
4803 appear in any order on the command line if the image format is
4804 MIFF (refer to miff(5) and the scene keyword is specified in the
4805 image. Otherwise the images will display in the order they
4806 appear on the command line.
4807
4809 Press any button to map or unmap the Command widget. See the next sec‐
4810 tion for more information about the Command widget.
4811
4813 The Command widget lists a number of sub-menus and commands. They are
4814
4815 Animate
4816
4817 Open
4818 Play
4819 Step
4820 Repeat
4821 Auto Reverse
4822
4823 Speed
4824
4825 Faster
4826 Slower
4827
4828 Direction
4829
4830 Forward
4831 Reverse
4832
4833 Image Info
4834 Help
4835 Quit
4836
4837
4838 Menu items with a indented triangle have a sub-menu. They are repre‐
4839 sented above as the indented items. To access a sub-menu item, move the
4840 pointer to the appropriate menu and press a button and drag. When you
4841 find the desired sub-menu item, release the button and the command is
4842 executed. Move the pointer away from the sub-menu if you decide not to
4843 execute a particular command.
4844
4846 Ctl+O
4847
4848 Press to load an image from a file.
4849 space
4850
4851 Press to display the next image in the sequence.
4852 <
4853
4854 Press to speed-up the display of the images. Refer to
4855 -delay for more information.
4856 >
4857
4858 Press to slow the display of the images. Refer to -delay
4859 for more information.
4860 ?
4861
4862 Press to display information about the image. Press any
4863 key or button to erase the information.
4864 This information is printed: image name; image size; and
4865 the total number of unique colors in the image.
4866 F1
4867
4868 Press to display helpful information about animate(1).
4869 Ctl-q
4870
4871 Press to discard all images and exit program.
4872
4873
4875 Animate options can appear on the command line or in your X resource
4876 file. Options on the command line supersede values specified in your X
4877 resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
4878
4879 All animate options have a corresponding X resource. In addition, the
4880 animate program uses the following X resources:
4881
4882 background (class Background)
4883
4884
4885 Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window
4886 background. The default is #ccc.
4887 borderColor (class BorderColor)
4888
4889
4890 Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window
4891 border. The default is #ccc.
4892 borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
4893
4894
4895 Specifies the width in pixels of the Image window border.
4896 The default is 2.
4897 font (class Font or FontList)
4898
4899
4900 Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in normal
4901 formatted text. The default is 14 point Helvetica.
4902 foreground (class Foreground)
4903
4904
4905 Specifies the preferred color to use for text within the
4906 Image window. The default is black.
4907 geometry (class geometry)
4908
4909
4910 Specifies the preferred size and position of the image
4911 window. It is not necessarily obeyed by all window man‐
4912 agers. Offsets, if present, are handled in X(1) style. A
4913 negative x offset is measured from the right edge of the
4914 screen to the right edge of the icon, and a negative y
4915 offset is measured from the bottom edge of the screen to
4916 the bottom edge of the icon.
4917 iconGeometry (class IconGeometry)
4918
4919
4920 Specifies the preferred size and position of the applica‐
4921 tion when iconified. It is not necessarily obeyed by all
4922 window managers. Offsets, if present, are handled in the
4923 same manner as in class Geometry.
4924 iconic (class Iconic)
4925
4926
4927 This resource indicates that you would prefer that the
4928 application's windows initially not be visible as if the
4929 windows had be immediately iconified by you. Window man‐
4930 agers may choose not to honor the application's request.
4931 matteColor (class MatteColor)
4932
4933
4934 Specify the color of windows. It is used for the back‐
4935 grounds of windows, menus, and notices. A 3D effect is
4936 achieved by using highlight and shadow colors derived from
4937 this color. Default value: #ddd.
4938 name (class Name)
4939
4940
4941 This resource specifies the name under which resources for
4942 the application should be found. This resource is useful
4943 in shell aliases to distinguish between invocations of an
4944 application, without resorting to creating links to alter
4945 the executable file name. The default is the application
4946 name.
4947 sharedMemory (class SharedMemory)
4948
4949
4950 This resource specifies whether animate should attempt use
4951 shared memory for pixmaps. ImageMagick must be compiled
4952 with shared memory support, and the display must support
4953 the MIT-SHM extension. Otherwise, this resource is
4954 ignored. The default is True.
4955 text_font (class textFont)
4956
4957
4958 Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in fixed
4959 (typewriter style) formatted text. The default is 14 point
4960 Courier.
4961 title (class Title)
4962
4963
4964 This resource specifies the title to be used for the Image
4965 window. This information is sometimes used by a window
4966 manager to provide some sort of header identifying the
4967 window. The default is the image file name.
4968
4969
4972 batch executes an arbitary number of the utility commands (e.g. con‐
4973 vert) in the form of a simple linear batch script in order to improve
4974 execution efficiency, and/or to allow use as a subordinate co-process
4975 under the control of an arbitrary script or program.
4976
4978 To drive 'gm batch' using a shell script (or a program written in any
4979 language), have the script/program send commands to 'gm batch' via its
4980 standard input. Specify that standard input should be used by using
4981 '-' as the file name. The following example converts all files match‐
4982 ing '*.jpg' to TIFF format while rotating each file by 90 degrees and
4983 stripping all embedded profiles. The shell script syntax is standard
4984 Unix shell:
4985
4986 for file in *.jpg
4987 do
4988 outfile=`basename $file .jpg`.tiff
4989 echo convert -verbose "'$file'" -rotate 90 \
4990 +profile "'*'" "'$outfile'"
4991 done | gm batch -echo on -feedback on -
4992
4993
4994 We can accomplish the same as the previous example by putting all the
4995 commands in a text file and then specifying the name of the text file
4996 as the script to execute:
4997
4998 for file in *.jpg
4999 do
5000 outfile=`basename $file .jpg`.tiff
5001 echo convert -verbose "'$file'" -rotate 90 \
5002 +profile "'*'" "'$outfile'"
5003 done > script.txt
5004 gm batch -echo on -feedback on script.txt
5005
5006
5008 Options are processed from left to right and must appear before any
5009 filename argument.
5010
5011 -echo on|off
5012 command echo on or off
5013
5014 Specify on to enable echoing commands to standard output as they
5015 are read or off to disable. The default is off.
5016
5017 -escape unix|windows
5018 Parse using unix or windows syntax
5019
5020 Commands must be parsed from the input stream and escaping needs
5021 to be used to protect spaces or quoting characters in the input.
5022 Specify unix to use unix-style command line parsing or windows
5023 for Microsoft Windows command shell style parsing. The default
5024 depends on if the software is compiled for Microsoft Windows or
5025 for a Unix-type system (including Cygwin on Microsoft Windows).
5026 It is recommended to use unix syntax because it is more powerful
5027 and more portable.
5028
5029 -fail text
5030 text to print if a command fails
5031
5032 When feedback is enabled, this specifies the text to print when
5033 the command fails. The default text is FAIL.
5034
5035 -feedback on|off
5036 enable error feedback
5037
5038 Print text (see -pass and -fail options) feedback after each
5039 command to indicate the result, the default is off.
5040
5041 -help
5042
5043 Prints batch command help.
5044
5045 -pass text
5046 text to print if a command passes
5047
5048 When feedback is enabled, this specifies the text to print when
5049 the command passes. The default text is PASS.
5050
5051 -prompt text
5052 Prompt text to use for command line
5053
5054 If no filename argument was specified, a simple command prompt
5055 appears where you may enter GraphicsMagick commands. The
5056 default prompt is GM>. Use this option to change the prompt to
5057 something else.
5058
5059 -stop-on-error on|off
5060 Specify if command processing stops on error
5061
5062 Normally command processing continues if a command encounters an
5063 error. Specify -stop-on-error on to cause processing to quit
5064 immediately on error.
5065
5068 benchmark executes an arbitrary gm utility command (e.g. convert) for
5069 one or more loops, and/or a specified execution time, and reports many
5070 execution metrics. For builds using OpenMP, a mode is provided to exe‐
5071 cute the benchmark with an increasing number of threads and provide a
5072 report of speedup and multi-thread execution efficiency. If benchmark
5073 is used to execute a command without any additional benchmark options,
5074 then the command is run once.
5075
5077 To obtain benchmark information for a single execution of a command:
5078
5079 gm benchmark convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5080
5081 To obtain benchmark information from 100 iterations of the command:
5082
5083 gm benchmark -iterations 100 convert input.ppm \
5084 -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5085
5086 To obtain benchmark information by iterating the command until a speci‐
5087 fied amount of time (in seconds) has been consumed:
5088
5089 gm benchmark -duration 30 convert input.ppm \
5090 -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5091
5092 To obtain a full performance report with an increasing number of
5093 threads (1-32 threads, stepping the number of threads by four each
5094 time):
5095
5096 gm benchmark -duration 3 -stepthreads 4 convert \
5097 input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm
5098
5099 Here is the interpretation of the output:
5100
5101 threads - number of threads used.
5102 iter - number of command iterations executed.
5103 user - total user time consumed.
5104 total - total elapsed time consumed.
5105 iter/s - number of command iterations per second.
5106 iter/cpu - amount of CPU time consumed per iteration.
5107 speedup - speedup compared with one thread.
5108 karp-flatt - Karp-Flatt measure of speedup efficiency.
5109
5110 Please note that the reported "speedup" is based on the execution time
5111 of just one thread. A preliminary warm-up pass is used before timing
5112 the first loop in order to ensure that the CPU is brought out of power-
5113 saving modes and that system caches are warmed up. Most modern CPUs
5114 provide a "turbo" mode where the CPU clock speed is increased (e.g. by
5115 a factor of two) when only one or two cores are active. If the CPU
5116 grows excessively hot (due to insufficient cooling), then it may dial
5117 back its clock rates as a form of thermal management. These factors
5118 result in an under-reporting of speedup compared to if "turbo" mode was
5119 disabled and the CPU does not need to worry about thermal management.
5120 The powertop utility available under Linux and Solaris provides a way
5121 to observe CPU core clock rates while a benchmark is running.
5122
5124 Options are processed from left to right and must appear before any
5125 argument.
5126
5127 -duration duration
5128 duration to run benchmark Specify the number of seconds to run
5129 the benchmark. The command is executed repeatedly until the
5130 specified amount of time has elapsed.
5131
5132 -help
5133
5134 Prints benchmark command help.
5135
5136 -iterations loops
5137 number of command iterations Specify the number of iterations to
5138 run the benchmark. The command is executed repeatedly until the
5139 specified number of iterations has been reached.
5140
5141 -rawcsv
5142 Print results in CSV format Print results in a comma-separated
5143 value (CSV) format which is easy to parse for plotting or
5144 importing into a spreadsheet or database. The values reported
5145 are threads, iterations, user_time, and elapsed_time.
5146
5147 -stepthreads step
5148 execute a per-thread benchmark ramp
5149 Execute a per-thread benchmark ramp, incrementing the number of
5150 threads at each step by the specified value. The maximum number
5151 of threads is taken from the standard OMP_NUM_THREADS environ‐
5152 ment variable.
5153
5155 compare compares two similar images using a specified statistical
5156 method (see -metric) and/or by writing a difference image (-file), with
5157 the altered pixels annotated using a specified method (see -highlight-
5158 style) and color (see -highlight-color). Reference-image is the origi‐
5159 nal image and compare-image is the (possibly) altered version, which
5160 should have the same dimensions as reference-image.
5161
5163 To compare two images using Mean Square Error (MSE) statistical analy‐
5164 sis use:
5165
5166 gm compare -metric mse original.miff compare.miff
5167
5168
5169 To create an annotated difference image use:
5170
5171 gm compare -highlight-style assign -highlight-color purple \
5172 -file diff.miff original.miff compare.miff
5173
5174
5176 Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5177 the command line remains in effect only for the image that follows.
5178 All options are reset to their default values after each image is read.
5179
5180 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5181
5182
5183 -authenticate <string>
5184 decrypt image with this password
5185
5186 -colorspace <value>
5187 the type of colorspace
5188
5189 -debug <events>
5190 enable debug printout
5191
5192 -define <key>{=<value>},...
5193 add coder/decoder specific options
5194
5195 -density <width>x<height>
5196 horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5197
5198 -depth <value>
5199 depth of the image
5200
5201 -display <host:display[.screen]>
5202 specifies the X server to contact
5203
5204 -endian <type>
5205 specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
5206
5207 -file <filename>
5208 write annotated difference image to file
5209
5210 -help print usage instructions
5211
5212 -highlight-color <color>
5213 pixel annotation color
5214
5215 -highlight-style <style>
5216 pixel annotation style
5217
5218 -interlace <type>
5219 the type of interlacing scheme
5220
5221 -limit <type> <value>
5222 Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height or Threads
5223 resource limit
5224
5225 -log <string>
5226 Specify format for debug log
5227
5228 -matte store matte channel if the image has one
5229
5230 -maximum-error <limit>
5231 specifies the maximum amount of total image error
5232
5233 -metric <metric>
5234 comparison metric (MAE, MSE, PAE, PSNR, RMSE)
5235
5236 -monitor
5237 show progress indication
5238
5239 -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
5240 chroma subsampling factors
5241
5242 -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
5243 width and height of the image
5244
5245 -type <type>
5246 the image type
5247
5248 -verbose
5249 print detailed information about the image
5250
5251 -version
5252 print GraphicsMagick version string
5253
5254 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options,
5255 above.
5256
5257
5259 composite composites (combines) images to create new images. base-
5260 image is the base image and change-image contains the changes. ouput-
5261 image is the result, and normally has the same dimensions as base-
5262 image.
5263
5264
5265 The optional mask-image can be used to provide opacity information for
5266 change-image when it has none or if you want a different mask. A mask
5267 image is typically grayscale and the same size as base-image. If mask-
5268 image is not grayscale, it is converted to grayscale and the resulting
5269 intensities are used as opacity information.
5270
5272 To composite an image of a cockatoo with a perch, use:
5273
5274 gm composite cockatoo.miff perch.ras composite.miff
5275
5276
5277 To compute the difference between images in a series, use:
5278
5279 gm composite -compose difference series.2 series.1
5280 difference.miff
5281
5282
5283 To composite an image of a cockatoo with a perch starting at location
5284 (100,150), use:
5285
5286 gm composite -geometry +100+150 cockatoo.miff
5287 perch.ras composite.miff
5288
5289
5290 To tile a logo across your image of a cockatoo, use
5291
5292 gm convert +shade 30x60 cockatoo.miff mask.miff
5293 gm composite -compose bumpmap -tile logo.png
5294 cockatoo.miff mask.miff composite.miff
5295
5296
5297 To composite a red, green, and blue color plane into a single composite
5298 image, try
5299
5300 gm composite -compose CopyGreen green.png red.png
5301 red-green.png
5302 gm composite -compose CopyBlue blue.png red-green.png
5303 gm composite.png
5304
5305
5307 Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5308 the command line remains in effect only for the image that follows.
5309 All options are reset to their default values after each image is read.
5310
5311 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5312
5313
5314 -authenticate <string>
5315 decrypt image with this password
5316
5317 -background <color>
5318 the background color
5319
5320 -blue-primary <x>,<y>
5321 blue chromaticity primary point
5322
5323 -colors <value>
5324 preferred number of colors in the image
5325
5326 -colorspace <value>
5327 the type of colorspace
5328
5329 -comment <string>
5330 annotate an image with a comment
5331
5332 -compose <operator>
5333 the type of image composition
5334
5335 -compress <type>
5336 the type of image compression
5337
5338 -debug <events>
5339 enable debug printout
5340
5341 -define <key>{=<value>},...
5342 add coder/decoder specific options
5343
5344 -density <width>x<height>
5345 horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5346
5347 -depth <value>
5348 depth of the image
5349
5350 -displace <horizontal scale>x<vertical scale>
5351 shift image pixels as defined by a displacement map
5352
5353 -display <host:display[.screen]>
5354 specifies the X server to contact
5355
5356 -dispose <method>
5357 GIF disposal method
5358
5359 -dissolve <percent>
5360 dissolve an image into another by the given percent
5361
5362 -dither
5363 apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
5364
5365 -encoding <type>
5366 specify the text encoding
5367
5368 -endian <type>
5369 specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
5370
5371 -filter <type>
5372 use this type of filter when resizing an image
5373
5374 -font <name>
5375 use this font when annotating the image with text
5376
5377 -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
5378 Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
5379
5380 -gravity <type>
5381 direction primitive gravitates to when annotating the image.
5382
5383 -green-primary <x>,<y>
5384 green chromaticity primary point
5385
5386 -help print usage instructions
5387
5388 -interlace <type>
5389 the type of interlacing scheme
5390
5391 -label <name>
5392 assign a label to an image
5393
5394 -limit <type> <value>
5395 Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height or Threads
5396 resource limit
5397
5398 -log <string>
5399 Specify format for debug log
5400
5401 -matte store matte channel if the image has one
5402
5403 -monitor
5404 show progress indication
5405
5406 -monochrome
5407 transform the image to black and white
5408
5409 -negate
5410 replace every pixel with its complementary color
5411
5412 -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
5413 size and location of an image canvas
5414
5415 -profile <filename>
5416 add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile to image
5417
5418 -quality <value>
5419 JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
5420
5421 -recolor <matrix>
5422 apply a color translation matrix to image channels
5423
5424 -red-primary <x>,<y>
5425 red chromaticity primary point
5426
5427 -render
5428 render vector operations
5429
5430 -repage <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
5431 Adjust image page offsets
5432
5433 -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
5434 resize an image
5435
5436 -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
5437 rotate the image
5438
5439 -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
5440 chroma subsampling factors
5441
5442 -scene <value>
5443 set scene number
5444
5445 -set <attribute> <value>
5446 set an image attribute
5447
5448 +set <attribute>
5449 unset an image attribute
5450
5451 -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
5452 sharpen the image
5453
5454 -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
5455 width and height of the image
5456
5457 -stegano <offset>
5458 hide watermark within an image
5459
5460 -stereo
5461 composite two images to create a stereo anaglyph
5462
5463 -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
5464
5465 -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
5466 resize an image (quickly)
5467
5468 -treedepth <value>
5469 tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
5470
5471 -trim trim an image
5472
5473 -type <type>
5474 the image type
5475
5476 -units <type>
5477 the units of image resolution
5478
5479 -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
5480 sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
5481
5482 -verbose
5483 print detailed information about the image
5484
5485 -version
5486 print GraphicsMagick version string
5487
5488 -watermark <brightness>x<saturation>
5489 percent brightness and saturation of a watermark
5490
5491 -white-point <x>,<y>
5492 chromaticity white point
5493
5494 -write <filename>
5495 write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
5496
5497 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options,
5498 above.
5499
5500
5502 The Magick scripting language (MSL) will primarily benefit those that
5503 want to accomplish custom image processing tasks but do not wish to
5504 program, or those that do not have access to a Perl interpreter or a
5505 compiler. The interpreter is called conjure and here is an example
5506 script:
5507
5508 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
5509 <image size="400x400" >
5510 <read filename="image.gif" />
5511 <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5512 <resize geometry="%[dimensions]" />
5513 <get width="width" height="height" />
5514 <print output=
5515 "Image sized from %[base-width]x%[base-height]
5516 to %[width]x%[height].\n" />
5517 <write filename="image.png" />
5518 </image>
5519
5520
5521 invoked with
5522
5523 gm conjure -dimensions 400x400 incantation.msl
5524
5525
5526 All operations will closely follow the key/value pairs defined in Perl‐
5527 Magick, unless otherwise noted.
5528
5530 Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5531 the command line remains in effect until it is explicitly changed by
5532 specifying the option again with a different effect, or if it is
5533 changed by a statement in the scripting language.
5534
5535 You can define your own keyword/value pairs on the command line. The
5536 script can then use this information when setting values by including
5537 %[keyword] in the string. For example, if you included "-dimensions
5538 400x400" on the command line, as illustrated above, then any string
5539 containing "%[dimensions]" would have 400x400 substituted. The
5540 "%[string]" can be used either an entire string, such as geome‐
5541 try="%[dimensions]" or as a part of a string such as filename="%[base‐
5542 name].png".
5543
5544 The keyword can be any string except for the following reserved strings
5545 (in any upper, lower, or mixed case variant): debug, help, and verbose,
5546 whose usage is described below.
5547
5548 The value can be any string. If either the keyword or the value con‐
5549 tains white space or any symbols that have special meanings to your
5550 shell such as "#", "|", or "%", enclose the string in quotation marks
5551 or use "\" to escape the white space and special symbols.
5552
5553 Keywords and values are case dependent. "Key", "key", and "KEY" would
5554 be three different keywords.
5555
5556 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5557
5558
5559 -debug <events>
5560 enable debug printout
5561
5562 -define <key>{=<value>},...
5563 add coder/decoder specific options
5564
5565 -help print usage instructions
5566
5567 -log <string>
5568 Specify format for debug log
5569
5570 -verbose
5571 print detailed information about the image
5572
5573 -version
5574 print GraphicsMagick version string
5575
5577 The Magick Scripting Language (MSL) presently defines the following
5578 elements and their attributes:
5579
5580 <image>
5581
5582 background, color, id, size
5583
5584 Define a new image object. </image> destroys it. Because
5585 of this, if you wish to reference multiple "subimages"
5586 (aka pages or layers), you can embed one image element
5587 inside of another. For example:
5588
5589
5590
5591 <image>
5592 <read filename="input.png" />
5593 <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5594 <image height="base-height" width="base-width">
5595 <image />
5596 <write filename="output.mng" />
5597 </image>
5598
5599
5600
5601
5602 <image size="400x400" />
5603
5604
5605 <group>
5606
5607
5608 Define a new group of image objects. By default, images
5609 are only valid for the life of their <image>element.
5610
5611
5612
5613 <image> -- creates the image
5614 ..... -- do stuff with it
5615 </image> -- dispose of the image
5616
5617
5618
5619 However, in a group, all images in that group will stay
5620 around for the life of the group:
5621
5622
5623
5624 <group> -- start a group
5625 <image> -- create an image
5626 .... -- do stuff
5627 </image> -- NOOP
5628 <image> -- create another
5629 image
5630 .... -- do more stuff
5631 </image> -- NOOP
5632 <write filename="image.mng" /> -- output
5633 </group> -- dispose of both
5634 images
5635
5636
5637 <read>
5638
5639 filename
5640
5641 Read a new image from a disk file.
5642
5643
5644
5645 <read filename="image.gif" />
5646
5647
5648
5649 To read two images use
5650
5651
5652
5653 <read filename="image.gif" />
5654 <read filename="image.png />
5655
5656
5657 <write>
5658
5659 filename
5660 Write the image(s) to disk, either as a single multiple-
5661 image file or multiple ones if necessary.
5662
5663
5664
5665 <write filename=image.tiff" />
5666
5667 <get>
5668
5669 Get any attribute recognized by PerlMagick's GetAt‐
5670 tribute() and stores it as an image attribute for later
5671 use. Currently only width and height are supported.
5672
5673
5674 <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5675 <print output="Image size is %[base-width]x%[base-
5676 height].\n" />
5677
5678
5679 <set>
5680
5681 background, bordercolor, clip-mask, colorspace, density,
5682 magick, mattecolor, opacity. Set an attribute recognized
5683 by PerlMagick's GetAttribute().
5684 <profile>
5685
5686 [profilename]
5687
5688 Read one or more IPTC, ICC or generic profiles from file
5689 and assign to image
5690
5691
5692
5693 <profile iptc="profile.iptc" generic="generic.dat" />
5694
5695
5696
5697 To remove a specified profile use "!" as the filename eg
5698
5699
5700
5701 <profile icm="!" iptc="profile.iptc" />
5702
5703
5704 <border>
5705
5706 fill, geometry, height, width
5707 <blur>
5708
5709 radius, sigma
5710 <charcoal>
5711
5712 radius, sigma
5713 <chop>
5714
5715 geometry, height, width, x, y
5716 <crop>
5717
5718 geometry, height, width, x, y
5719 <composite>
5720
5721 compose, geometry, gravity, image, x, y
5722
5723
5724 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
5725 <group>
5726 <image id="image_01">
5727 <read filename="cloud3.gif"/>
5728 <resize geometry="250x90"/>
5729 </image>
5730 <image id="image_02">
5731 <read filename="cloud4.gif"/>
5732 <resize geometry="190x100"/>
5733 </image>
5734 <image>
5735 <read filename="background.jpg"/>
5736 <composite image="image_01" geome‐
5737 try="+740+470"/>
5738 <composite image="image_02" geome‐
5739 try="+390+415"/>
5740 </image>
5741 <write filename="result.png"/>
5742 </group>
5743
5744
5745 <despeckle>
5746
5747 <emboss>
5748
5749 radius, sigma
5750 <enhance>
5751
5752 <equalize>
5753
5754 <edge>
5755
5756 radius
5757 <flip>
5758
5759 <flop>
5760
5761 <frame>
5762
5763 fill, geometry, height, width, x, y, inner, outer
5764 <flatten>
5765
5766 <get>
5767
5768 height, width
5769 <gamma>
5770
5771 red, green, blue
5772 <image>
5773
5774 background, color, id, size
5775 <implode>
5776
5777 amount
5778 <magnify>
5779
5780 <minify>
5781
5782 <medianfilter>
5783
5784 radius
5785 <normalize>
5786
5787 <oilpaint>
5788
5789 radius
5790 <print>
5791
5792 output
5793 <profile>
5794
5795 [profilename]
5796 <read>
5797
5798 <resize>
5799
5800 blur, filter, geometry, height, width
5801 <roll>
5802
5803 geometry, x, y
5804 <rotate>
5805
5806 degrees
5807 <reducenoise>
5808
5809 radius
5810 <sample>
5811
5812 geometry, height, width
5813 <scale>
5814
5815 geometry, height, width
5816 <sharpen>
5817
5818 radius, sigma
5819 <shave>
5820
5821 geometry, height, width
5822 <shear>
5823
5824 x, y
5825 <solarize>
5826
5827 threshold
5828 <spread>
5829
5830 radius
5831 <stegano>
5832
5833 image
5834 <stereo>
5835
5836 image
5837 <swirl>
5838
5839 degrees
5840 <texture>
5841
5842 image
5843 <threshold>
5844
5845 threshold
5846 <transparent>
5847
5848 color
5849 <trim>
5850
5851
5852
5854 Convert converts an input file using one image format to an output file
5855 with a differing image format. In addition, various types of image pro‐
5856 cessing can be performed on the converted image during the conversion
5857 process. Convert recognizes the image formats listed in GraphicsMag‐
5858 ick(1).
5859
5860
5862 To make a thumbnail of a JPEG image, use:
5863
5864 gm convert -size 120x120 cockatoo.jpg -resize 120x120
5865 +profile "*" thumbnail.jpg
5866
5867
5868 In this example, '-size 120x120' gives a hint to the JPEG decoder that
5869 the image is going to be downscaled to 120x120, allowing it to run
5870 faster by avoiding returning full-resolution images to GraphicsMagick
5871 for the subsequent resizing operation. The ´-resize 120x120' specifies
5872 the desired dimensions of the output image. It will be scaled so its
5873 largest dimension is 120 pixels. The ´+profile "*"' removes any ICM,
5874 EXIF, IPTC, or other profiles that might be present in the input and
5875 aren't needed in the thumbnail.
5876
5877 To convert a MIFF image of a cockatoo to a SUN raster image, use:
5878
5879 gm convert cockatoo.miff sun:cockatoo.ras
5880
5881
5882 To convert a multi-page PostScript document to individual FAX pages,
5883 use:
5884
5885 gm convert -monochrome document.ps fax:page
5886
5887
5888 To convert a TIFF image to a PostScript A4 page with the image in the
5889 lower left-hand corner, use:
5890
5891 gm convert -page A4+0+0 image.tiff document.ps
5892
5893
5894 To convert a raw Gray image with a 128 byte header to a portable
5895 graymap, use:
5896
5897 gm convert -depth 8 -size 768x512+128 gray:raw
5898 image.pgm
5899
5900
5901 In this example, "raw" is the input file. Its format is "gray" and it
5902 has the dimensions and number of header bytes specified by the -size
5903 option and the sample depth specified by the -depth option. The output
5904 file is "image.pgm". The suffix ".pgm" specifies its format.
5905
5906 To convert a Photo CD image to a TIFF image, use:
5907
5908 gm convert -size 1536x1024 img0009.pcd image.tiff
5909 gm convert img0009.pcd[4] image.tiff
5910
5911
5912 To create a visual image directory of all your JPEG images, use:
5913
5914 gm convert 'vid:*.jpg' directory.miff
5915
5916
5917 To annotate an image with blue text using font 12x24 at position
5918 (100,100), use:
5919
5920 gm convert -font helvetica -fill blue
5921 -draw "text 100,100 Cockatoo"
5922 bird.jpg bird.miff
5923
5924
5925 To tile a 640x480 image with a JPEG texture with bumps use:
5926
5927 gm convert -size 640x480 tile:bumps.jpg tiled.png
5928
5929
5930 To surround an icon with an ornamental border to use with Mosaic(1),
5931 use:
5932
5933 gm convert -mattecolor "#697B8F" -frame 6x6 bird.jpg
5934 icon.png
5935
5936
5937 To create a MNG animation from a DNA molecule sequence, use:
5938
5939 gm convert -delay 20 dna.* dna.mng
5940
5941
5943 Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5944 the command line remains in effect for the set of images that follows,
5945 until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
5946 Some options only affect the decoding of images and others only the
5947 encoding. The latter can appear after the final group of input images.
5948
5949 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5950
5951
5952 -adjoin
5953 join images into a single multi-image file
5954
5955 -affine <matrix>
5956 drawing transform matrix
5957
5958 -antialias
5959 remove pixel aliasing
5960
5961 -append
5962 append a set of images
5963
5964 -asc-cdl <spec>
5965 apply ASC CDL color transform
5966
5967 -authenticate <string>
5968 decrypt image with this password
5969
5970 -auto-orient
5971 orient (rotate) image so it is upright
5972
5973 -average
5974 average a set of images
5975
5976 -background <color>
5977 the background color
5978
5979 -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
5980 pixels below the threshold become black
5981
5982 -blue-primary <x>,<y>
5983 blue chromaticity primary point
5984
5985 -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
5986 blur the image with a Gaussian operator
5987
5988 -border <width>x<height>
5989 surround the image with a border of color
5990
5991 -bordercolor <color>
5992 the border color
5993
5994 -box <color>
5995 set the color of the annotation bounding box
5996
5997 -channel <type>
5998 the type of channel
5999
6000 -charcoal <factor>
6001 simulate a charcoal drawing
6002
6003 -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
6004 remove pixels from the interior of an image
6005
6006 -clip apply the clipping path, if one is present
6007
6008 -coalesce
6009 merge a sequence of images
6010
6011 -colorize <value>
6012 colorize the image with the pen color
6013
6014 -colors <value>
6015 preferred number of colors in the image
6016
6017 -colorspace <value>
6018 the type of colorspace
6019
6020 -comment <string>
6021 annotate an image with a comment
6022
6023 -compose <operator>
6024 the type of image composition
6025
6026 -compress <type>
6027 the type of image compression
6028
6029 -contrast
6030 enhance or reduce the image contrast
6031
6032 -convolve <kernel>
6033 convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
6034
6035 -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
6036 preferred size and location of the cropped image
6037
6038 -cycle <amount>
6039 displace image colormap by amount
6040
6041 -debug <events>
6042 enable debug printout
6043
6044 -deconstruct
6045 break down an image sequence into constituent parts
6046
6047 -define <key>{=<value>},...
6048 add coder/decoder specific options
6049
6050 -delay <1/100ths of a second>
6051 display the next image after pausing
6052
6053 -density <width>x<height>
6054 horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
6055
6056 -depth <value>
6057 depth of the image
6058
6059 -despeckle
6060 reduce the speckles within an image
6061
6062 -display <host:display[.screen]>
6063 specifies the X server to contact
6064
6065 -dispose <method>
6066 GIF disposal method
6067
6068 -dither
6069 apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
6070
6071 -draw <string>
6072 annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
6073
6074 -edge <radius>
6075 detect edges within an image
6076
6077 -emboss <radius>
6078 emboss an image
6079
6080 -encoding <type>
6081 specify the text encoding
6082
6083 -endian <type>
6084 specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
6085
6086 -enhance
6087 apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
6088
6089 -equalize
6090 perform histogram equalization to the image
6091
6092 -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6093 composite image on background color canvas image
6094
6095 -fill <color>
6096 color to use when filling a graphic primitive
6097
6098 -filter <type>
6099 use this type of filter when resizing an image
6100
6101 -flatten
6102 flatten a sequence of images
6103
6104 -flip create a "mirror image"
6105
6106 -flop create a "mirror image"
6107
6108 -font <name>
6109 use this font when annotating the image with text
6110
6111 -format <string>
6112 output formatted image characteristics
6113
6114 -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
6115 surround the image with an ornamental border
6116
6117 -fuzz <distance>{%}
6118 colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
6119
6120 -gamma <value>
6121 level of gamma correction
6122
6123 -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
6124 blur the image with a Gaussian operator
6125
6126 -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
6127 Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
6128
6129 -gravity <type>
6130 direction primitive gravitates to when annotating the image.
6131
6132 -green-primary <x>,<y>
6133 green chromaticity primary point
6134
6135 -hald-clut <clut>
6136 apply a Hald CLUT to the image
6137
6138 -help print usage instructions
6139
6140 -implode <factor>
6141 implode image pixels about the center
6142
6143 -intent <type>
6144 use this type of rendering intent when managing the image color
6145
6146 -interlace <type>
6147 the type of interlacing scheme
6148
6149 -label <name>
6150 assign a label to an image
6151
6152 -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
6153 perform local adaptive thresholding
6154
6155 -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
6156 adjust the level of image contrast
6157
6158 -limit <type> <value>
6159 Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height or Threads
6160 resource limit
6161
6162 -list <type>
6163 the type of list
6164
6165 -log <string>
6166 Specify format for debug log
6167
6168 -loop <iterations>
6169 add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
6170
6171 -magnify
6172 magnify the image
6173
6174 -map <filename>
6175 choose a particular set of colors from this image
6176
6177 -mask <filename>
6178 Specify a clipping mask
6179
6180 -matte store matte channel if the image has one
6181
6182 -mattecolor <color>
6183 specify the color to be used with the -frame option
6184
6185 -median <radius>
6186 apply a median filter to the image
6187
6188 -minify <factor>
6189 minify the image
6190
6191 -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
6192 vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
6193
6194 -monitor
6195 show progress indication
6196
6197 -monochrome
6198 transform the image to black and white
6199
6200 -morph <frames>
6201 morphs an image sequence
6202
6203 -mosaic
6204 create a mosaic from an image or an image sequence
6205
6206 -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
6207 Simulate motion blur
6208
6209 -negate
6210 replace every pixel with its complementary color
6211
6212 -noise <radius|type>
6213 add or reduce noise in an image
6214
6215 -noop NOOP (no option)
6216
6217 -normalize
6218 transform image to span the full range of color values
6219
6220 -opaque <color>
6221 change this color to the pen color within the image
6222
6223 -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
6224 apply a mathematical, bitwise, or value operator to an image
6225 channel
6226
6227 -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
6228 ordered dither the image
6229
6230 -orient <orientation>
6231 Set the image orientation attribute
6232
6233 -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
6234 size and location of an image canvas
6235
6236 -paint <radius>
6237 simulate an oil painting
6238
6239 -pen <color>
6240 (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
6241
6242 -ping efficiently determine image characteristics
6243
6244 -pointsize <value>
6245 pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
6246
6247 -preview <type>
6248 image preview type
6249
6250 -process <command>
6251 process a sequence of images using a process module
6252
6253 -profile <filename>
6254 add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile to image
6255
6256 -quality <value>
6257 JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
6258
6259 -raise <width>x<height>
6260 lighten or darken image edges
6261
6262 -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
6263 random threshold the image
6264
6265 -recolor <matrix>
6266 apply a color translation matrix to image channels
6267
6268 -red-primary <x>,<y>
6269 red chromaticity primary point
6270
6271 -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6272 apply options to a portion of the image
6273
6274 -render
6275 render vector operations
6276
6277 -repage <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
6278 Adjust image page offsets
6279
6280 -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
6281 Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
6282
6283 -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
6284 resize an image
6285
6286 -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6287 roll an image vertically or horizontally
6288
6289 -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
6290 rotate the image
6291
6292 -sample <geometry>
6293 scale image using pixel sampling
6294
6295 -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
6296 chroma subsampling factors
6297
6298 -scale <geometry>
6299 scale the image.
6300
6301 -scene <value>
6302 set scene number
6303
6304 -set <attribute> <value>
6305 set an image attribute
6306
6307 +set <attribute>
6308 unset an image attribute
6309
6310 -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
6311 segment an image
6312
6313 -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
6314 shade the image using a distant light source
6315
6316 -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
6317 sharpen the image
6318
6319 -shave <width>x<height>{%}
6320 shave pixels from the image edges
6321
6322 -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
6323 shear the image along the X or Y axis
6324
6325 -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
6326 width and height of the image
6327
6328 -solarize <factor>
6329 negate all pixels above the threshold level
6330
6331 -spread <amount>
6332 displace image pixels by a random amount
6333
6334 -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
6335
6336 -stroke <color>
6337 color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
6338
6339 -strokewidth <value>
6340 set the stroke width
6341
6342 -swirl <degrees>
6343 swirl image pixels about the center
6344
6345 -texture <filename>
6346 name of texture to tile onto the image background
6347
6348 -threshold <value>{%}
6349 threshold the image
6350
6351 -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
6352 resize an image (quickly)
6353
6354 -tile <filename>
6355 tile image when filling a graphic primitive
6356
6357 -transform
6358 transform the image
6359
6360 -transparent <color>
6361 make this color transparent within the image
6362
6363 -treedepth <value>
6364 tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
6365
6366 -trim trim an image
6367
6368 -type <type>
6369 the image type
6370
6371 -units <type>
6372 the units of image resolution
6373
6374 -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
6375 sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
6376
6377 -use-pixmap
6378 use the pixmap
6379
6380 -verbose
6381 print detailed information about the image
6382
6383 -version
6384 print GraphicsMagick version string
6385
6386 -view <string>
6387 FlashPix viewing parameters
6388
6389 -virtual-pixel <method>
6390 specify contents of "virtual pixels"
6391
6392 -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
6393 alter an image along a sine wave
6394
6395 -white-point <x>,<y>
6396 chromaticity white point
6397
6398 -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
6399 pixels above the threshold become white
6400
6401 -write <filename>
6402 write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
6403
6404 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options,
6405 above.
6406
6408 Display is a machine architecture independent image processing and dis‐
6409 play program. It can display an image on any workstation screen running
6410 an X server. Display can read and write many of the more popular image
6411 formats (e.g. JPEG, TIFF, PNM, Photo CD, etc.).
6412
6413 With display, you can perform these functions on an image:
6414
6415 o load an image from a file
6416 o display the next image
6417 o display the former image
6418 o display a sequence of images as a slide show
6419 o write the image to a file
6420 o print the image to a PostScript printer
6421 o delete the image file
6422 o create a Visual Image Directory
6423 o select the image to display by its thumbnail rather than
6424 name
6425 o undo last image transformation
6426 o copy a region of the image
6427 o paste a region to the image
6428 o restore the image to its original size
6429 o refresh the image
6430 o half the image size
6431 o double the image size
6432 o resize the image
6433 o crop the image
6434 o cut the image
6435 o flop image in the horizontal direction
6436 o flip image in the vertical direction
6437 o rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise
6438 o rotate the image 90 degrees counter-clockwise
6439 o rotate the image
6440 o shear the image
6441 o roll the image
6442 o trim the image edges
6443 o invert the colors of the image
6444 o vary the color brightness
6445 o vary the color saturation
6446 o vary the image hue
6447 o gamma correct the image
6448 o sharpen the image contrast
6449 o dull the image contrast
6450 o perform histogram equalization on the image
6451 o perform histogram normalization on the image
6452 o negate the image colors
6453 o convert the image to grayscale
6454 o set the maximum number of unique colors in the image
6455 o reduce the speckles within an image
6456 o eliminate peak noise from an image
6457 o detect edges within the image
6458 o emboss an image
6459 o segment the image by color
6460 o simulate an oil painting
6461 o simulate a charcoal drawing
6462 o annotate the image with text
6463 o draw on the image
6464 o edit an image pixel color
6465 o edit the image matte information
6466 o composite an image with another
6467 o add a border to the image
6468 o surround image with an ornamental border
6469 o apply image processing techniques to a region of interest
6470 o display information about the image
6471 o zoom a portion of the image
6472 o show a histogram of the image
6473 o display image to background of a window
6474 o set user preferences
6475 o display information about this program
6476 o discard all images and exit program
6477 o change the level of magnification
6478 o display images specified by a World Wide Web (WWW) uniform
6479 resource locator (URL)
6480
6481
6483 To scale an image of a cockatoo to exactly 640 pixels in width and 480
6484 pixels in height and position the window at location (200,200), use:
6485
6486 gm display -geometry 640x480+200+200! cockatoo.miff
6487
6488
6489 To display an image of a cockatoo without a border centered on a back‐
6490 drop, use:
6491
6492 gm display +borderwidth -backdrop cockatoo.miff
6493
6494
6495 To tile a slate texture onto the root window, use:
6496
6497 gm display -size 1280x1024 -window root slate.png
6498
6499
6500 To display a visual image directory of all your JPEG images, use:
6501
6502 gm display 'vid:*.jpg'
6503
6504
6505 To display a MAP image that is 640 pixels in width and 480 pixels in
6506 height with 256 colors, use:
6507
6508 gm display -size 640x480+256 cockatoo.map
6509
6510
6511 To display an image of a cockatoo specified with a World Wide Web (WWW)
6512 uniform resource locator (URL), use:
6513
6514 gm display ftp://wizards.dupont.com/images/cockatoo.jpg
6515
6516
6517 To display histogram of an image, use:
6518
6519 gm gm convert file.jpg HISTOGRAM:- | gm display -
6520
6521
6523 Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
6524 the command line remains in effect until it is explicitly changed by
6525 specifying the option again with a different effect. For example to
6526 display three images, the first with 32 colors, the second with an
6527 unlimited number of colors, and the third with only 16 colors, use:
6528
6529 gm display -colors 32 cockatoo.miff -noop duck.miff
6530 -colors 16 macaw.miff
6531
6532
6533 Display options can appear on the command line or in your X resources
6534 file. See X(1). Options on the command line supersede values specified
6535 in your X resources file.
6536
6537 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
6538
6539
6540 -authenticate <string>
6541 decrypt image with this password
6542
6543 -backdrop
6544 display the image centered on a backdrop.
6545
6546 -background <color>
6547 the background color
6548
6549 -border <width>x<height>
6550 surround the image with a border of color
6551
6552 -bordercolor <color>
6553 the border color
6554
6555 -borderwidth <geometry>
6556 the border width
6557
6558 -colormap <type>
6559 define the colormap type
6560
6561 -colors <value>
6562 preferred number of colors in the image
6563
6564 -colorspace <value>
6565 the type of colorspace
6566
6567 -comment <string>
6568 annotate an image with a comment
6569
6570 -compress <type>
6571 the type of image compression
6572
6573 -contrast
6574 enhance or reduce the image contrast
6575
6576 -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
6577 preferred size and location of the cropped image
6578
6579 -debug <events>
6580 enable debug printout
6581
6582 -define <key>{=<value>},...
6583 add coder/decoder specific options
6584
6585 -delay <1/100ths of a second>
6586 display the next image after pausing
6587
6588 -density <width>x<height>
6589 horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
6590
6591 -depth <value>
6592 depth of the image
6593
6594 -despeckle
6595 reduce the speckles within an image
6596
6597 -display <host:display[.screen]>
6598 specifies the X server to contact
6599
6600 -dispose <method>
6601 GIF disposal method
6602
6603 -dither
6604 apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
6605
6606 -edge <radius>
6607 detect edges within an image
6608
6609 -endian <type>
6610 specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
6611
6612 -enhance
6613 apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
6614
6615 -filter <type>
6616 use this type of filter when resizing an image
6617
6618 -flip create a "mirror image"
6619
6620 -flop create a "mirror image"
6621
6622 -font <name>
6623 use this font when annotating the image with text
6624
6625 -foreground <color>
6626 define the foreground color
6627
6628 -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
6629 surround the image with an ornamental border
6630
6631 -gamma <value>
6632 level of gamma correction
6633
6634 -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
6635 Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
6636
6637 -help print usage instructions
6638
6639 -iconGeometry <geometry>
6640 specify the icon geometry
6641
6642 -iconic
6643 iconic animation
6644
6645 -immutable
6646 make image immutable
6647
6648 -interlace <type>
6649 the type of interlacing scheme
6650
6651 -label <name>
6652 assign a label to an image
6653
6654 -limit <type> <value>
6655 Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height or Threads
6656 resource limit
6657
6658 -log <string>
6659 Specify format for debug log
6660
6661 -magnify <factor>
6662 magnify the image
6663
6664 -map <type>
6665 display image using this type.
6666
6667 -matte store matte channel if the image has one
6668
6669 -mattecolor <color>
6670 specify the color to be used with the -frame option
6671
6672 -monitor
6673 show progress indication
6674
6675 -monochrome
6676 transform the image to black and white
6677
6678 -name name an image
6679
6680 -negate
6681 replace every pixel with its complementary color
6682
6683 -noop NOOP (no option)
6684
6685 -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
6686 size and location of an image canvas
6687
6688 +progress
6689 disable progress monitor and busy cursor
6690
6691 -quality <value>
6692 JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
6693
6694 -raise <width>x<height>
6695 lighten or darken image edges
6696
6697 -remote
6698 perform a X11 remote operation
6699
6700 -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6701 roll an image vertically or horizontally
6702
6703 -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
6704 rotate the image
6705
6706 -sample <geometry>
6707 scale image using pixel sampling
6708
6709 -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
6710 chroma subsampling factors
6711
6712 -scenes <value-value>
6713 range of image scene numbers to read
6714
6715 -set <attribute> <value>
6716 set an image attribute
6717
6718 +set <attribute>
6719 unset an image attribute
6720
6721 -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
6722 segment an image
6723
6724 -shared-memory
6725 use shared memory
6726
6727 -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
6728 sharpen the image
6729
6730 -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
6731 width and height of the image
6732
6733 -text-font <name>
6734 font for writing fixed-width text
6735
6736 -texture <filename>
6737 name of texture to tile onto the image background
6738
6739 -title <string>
6740 assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
6741
6742 -treedepth <value>
6743 tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
6744
6745 -trim trim an image
6746
6747 -type <type>
6748 the image type
6749
6750 -update <seconds>
6751 detect when image file is modified and redisplay.
6752
6753 -use-pixmap
6754 use the pixmap
6755
6756 -verbose
6757 print detailed information about the image
6758
6759 -version
6760 print GraphicsMagick version string
6761
6762 -visual <type>
6763 animate images using this X visual type
6764
6765 -window <id>
6766 make image the background of a window
6767
6768 -window-group
6769 specify the window group
6770
6771 -write <filename>
6772 write the image to a file [display]
6773
6774 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options,
6775 above.
6776
6777
6779 The effects of each button press is described below. Three buttons are
6780 required. If you have a two button mouse, button 1 and 3 are returned.
6781 Press ALT and button 3 to simulate button 2.
6782
6783 1 Press this button to map or unmap the Command widget . See the
6784 next section for more information about the Command widget.
6785
6786 2 Press and drag to define a region of the image to magnify.
6787
6788 3 Press and drag to choose from a select set of display(1) com‐
6789 mands. This button behaves differently if the image being dis‐
6790 played is a visual image directory. Choose a particular tile of
6791 the directory and press this button and drag to select a command
6792 from a pop-up menu. Choose from these menu items:
6793
6794 Open
6795 Next
6796 Former
6797 Delete
6798 Update
6799
6800
6801 If you choose Open, the image represented by the tile is dis‐
6802 played. To return to the visual image directory, choose Next
6803 from the Command widget (refer to Command Widget). Next and
6804 Former moves to the next or former image respectively. Choose
6805 Delete to delete a particular image tile. Finally, choose Update
6806 to synchronize all the image tiles with their respective images.
6807 See montage and miff for more details.
6808
6810 The Command widget lists a number of sub-menus and commands. They are
6811
6812 File
6813
6814 Open...
6815 Next
6816 Former
6817 Select...
6818 Save...
6819 Print...
6820 Delete...
6821 Canvas...
6822 Visual Directory...
6823 Quit
6824
6825
6826
6827 Edit
6828
6829 Undo
6830 Redo
6831 Cut
6832 Copy
6833 Paste
6834
6835
6836
6837 View
6838
6839 Half Size
6840 Original Size
6841 Double Size
6842 Resize...
6843 Apply
6844 Refresh
6845 Restore
6846
6847
6848
6849 Transform
6850
6851 Crop
6852 Chop
6853 Flop
6854 Flip
6855 Rotate Right
6856 Rotate Left
6857 Rotate...
6858 Shear...
6859 Roll...
6860 Trim Edges
6861
6862
6863
6864 Enhance
6865
6866 Hue...
6867 Saturation...
6868 Brightness...
6869 Gamma...
6870 Spiff...
6871 Dull
6872 Equalize
6873 Normalize
6874 Negate
6875 GRAYscale
6876 Quantize...
6877
6878
6879
6880 Effects
6881
6882 Despeckle
6883 Emboss
6884 Reduce Noise
6885 Add Noise
6886 Sharpen...
6887 Blur...
6888 Threshold...
6889 Edge Detect...
6890 Spread...
6891 Shade...
6892 Raise...
6893 Segment...
6894
6895
6896
6897 F/X
6898
6899 Solarize...
6900 Swirl...
6901 Implode...
6902 Wave...
6903 Oil Paint...
6904 Charcoal Draw...
6905
6906
6907
6908 Image Edit
6909
6910 Annotate...
6911 Draw...
6912 Color...
6913 Matte...
6914 Composite...
6915 Add Border...
6916 Add Frame...
6917 Comment...
6918 Launch...
6919 Region of Interest...
6920
6921
6922
6923 Miscellany
6924
6925 Image Info
6926 Zoom Image
6927 Show Preview...
6928 Show Histogram
6929 Show Matte
6930 Background...
6931 Slide Show
6932 Preferences...
6933
6934
6935
6936 Help
6937
6938 Overview
6939 Browse Documentation
6940 About Display
6941
6942
6943
6944 Menu items with a indented triangle have a sub-menu. They are repre‐
6945 sented above as the indented items. To access a sub-menu item, move the
6946 pointer to the appropriate menu and press button 1 and drag. When you
6947 find the desired sub-menu item, release the button and the command is
6948 executed. Move the pointer away from the sub-menu if you decide not to
6949 execute a particular command.
6950
6952 Accelerators are one or two key presses that effect a particular com‐
6953 mand. The keyboard accelerators that display understands is:
6954
6955 Ctl+O Press to load an image from a file.
6956 space Press to display the next image.
6957
6958
6959 If the image is a multi-paged document such as a PostScript document,
6960 you can skip ahead several pages by preceding this command with a num‐
6961 ber. For example to display the fourth page beyond the current page,
6962 press 4space.
6963
6964 backspace Press to display the former image.
6965
6966
6967 If the image is a multi-paged document such as a PostScript document,
6968 you can skip behind several pages by preceding this command with a num‐
6969 ber. For example to display the fourth page preceding the current
6970 page, press 4n.
6971
6972 Ctl-S Press to save the image to a file.
6973 Ctl-P Press to print the image to a
6974 PostScript printer.
6975 Ctl-D Press to delete an image file.
6976 Ctl-N Press to create a blank canvas.
6977 Ctl-Q Press to discard all images and exit program.
6978 Ctl+Z Press to undo last image transformation.
6979 Ctl+R Press to redo last image transformation.
6980 Ctl-X Press to cut a region of
6981 the image.
6982 Ctl-C Press to copy a region of
6983 the image.
6984 Ctl-V Press to paste a region to
6985 the image.
6986 < Press to halve the image size.
6987 . Press to return to the original image size.
6988 > Press to double the image size.
6989 % Press to resize the image to a width and height
6990 you specify.
6991 Cmd-A Press to make any image transformations
6992 permanent.
6993 By default, any image size transformations are
6994 applied to the original image to create the
6995 image displayed on the X server. However, the
6996 transformations are not permanent (i.e. the
6997 original image does not change size only the
6998 X image does). For example, if you press ">"
6999 the X image will appear to double in size, but
7000 the original image will in fact remain the same
7001 size. To force the original image to double in
7002 size, press ">" followed by "Cmd-A".
7003 @ Press to refresh the image window.
7004 C Press to crop the image.
7005 [ Press to chop the image.
7006 H Press to flop image in the horizontal direction.
7007 V Press to flip image in the vertical direction.
7008 / Press to rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise.
7009 \ Press to rotate the image 90 degrees
7010 counter-clockwise.
7011 * Press to rotate the image
7012 the number of degrees you specify.
7013 S Press to shear the image the number of degrees
7014 you specify.
7015 R Press to roll the image.
7016 T Press to trim the image edges.
7017 Shft-H Press to vary the color hue.
7018 Shft-S Press to vary the color saturation.
7019 Shft-L Press to vary the image brightness.
7020 Shft-G Press to gamma correct the image.
7021 Shft-C Press to spiff up the image contrast.
7022 Shft-Z Press to dull the image contrast.
7023 = Press to perform histogram equalization on
7024 the image.
7025 Shft-N Press to perform histogram normalization on
7026 the image.
7027 Shft-~ Press to negate the colors of the image.
7028 . Press to convert the image colors to gray.
7029 Shft-# Press to set the maximum number of unique
7030 colors in the image.
7031 F2 Press to reduce the speckles in an image.
7032 F2 Press to emboss an image.
7033 F4 Press to eliminate peak noise from an image.
7034 F5 Press to add noise to an image.
7035 F6 Press to sharpen an image.
7036 F7 Press to blur image an image.
7037 F8 Press to threshold the image.
7038 F9 Press to detect edges within an image.
7039 F10 Press to displace pixels by a random amount.
7040 F11 Press to shade the image using a distant light
7041 source.
7042 F12 Press to lighten or darken image edges to
7043 create a 3-D effect.
7044 F13 Press to segment the image by color.
7045 Meta-S Press to swirl image pixels about the center.
7046 Meta-I Press to implode image pixels about the center.
7047 Meta-W Press to alter an image along a sine wave.
7048 Meta-P Press to simulate an oil painting.
7049 Meta-C Press to simulate a charcoal drawing.
7050 Alt-X Press to composite the image
7051 with another.
7052 Alt-A Press to annotate the image with text.
7053 Alt-D Press to draw a line on the image.
7054 Alt-P Press to edit an image pixel color.
7055 Alt-M Press to edit the image matte information.
7056 Alt-X Press to composite the image with another.
7057 Alt-A Press to add a border to the image.
7058 Alt-F Press to add a ornamental frame to the image.
7059 Alt-Shft-! Press to add an image comment.
7060 Ctl-A Press to apply image processing techniques to a
7061 region of interest.
7062 Shft-? Press to display information about the image.
7063 Shft-+ Press to map the zoom image window.
7064 Shft-P Press to preview an image enhancement, effect,
7065 or f/x.
7066 F1 Press to display helpful information about
7067 the "display" utility.
7068 Find Press to browse documentation about
7069 GraphicsMagick.
7070 1-9 Press to change the level of magnification.
7071
7072
7073 Use the arrow keys to move the image one pixel up, down, left, or right
7074 within the magnify window. Be sure to first map the magnify window by
7075 pressing button 2.
7076
7077 Press ALT and one of the arrow keys to trim off one pixel from any side
7078 of the image.
7079
7081 Display options can appear on the command line or in your X resource
7082 file. Options on the command line supersede values specified in your X
7083 resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
7084
7085 Most display options have a corresponding X resource. In addition, dis‐
7086 play uses the following X resources:
7087
7088 background (class Background)
7089 Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window back‐
7090 ground. The default is #ccc.
7091
7092 borderColor (class BorderColor)
7093 Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window bor‐
7094 der. The default is #ccc.
7095
7096 borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
7097 Specifies the width in pixels of the image window border. The
7098 default is 2.
7099
7100 browseCommand (class browseCommand)
7101 Specifies the name of the preferred browser when displaying
7102 GraphicsMagick documentation. The default is netscape %s.
7103
7104 confirmExit (class ConfirmExit)
7105 Display pops up a dialog box to confirm exiting the program
7106 when exiting the program. Set this resource to False to exit
7107 without a confirmation.
7108
7109 displayGamma (class DisplayGamma)
7110 Specifies the gamma of the X server. You can apply separate
7111 gamma values to the red, green, and blue channels of the image
7112 with a gamma value list delineated with slashes (i.e.
7113 1.7/2.3/1.2). The default is 2.2.
7114
7115 displayWarnings (class DisplayWarnings)
7116 Display pops up a dialog box whenever a warning message occurs.
7117 Set this resource to False to ignore warning messages.
7118
7119 font (class FontList)
7120 Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in normal for‐
7121 matted text. The default is 14 point Helvetica.
7122
7123 font[1-9] (class Font[1-9])
7124 Specifies the name of the preferred font to use when annotating
7125 the image window with text. The default fonts are fixed, vari‐
7126 able, 5x8, 6x10, 7x13bold, 8x13bold, 9x15bold, 10x20, and 12x24.
7127
7128 foreground (class Foreground)
7129 Specifies the preferred color to use for text within the image
7130 window. The default is black.
7131
7132 gammaCorrect (class gammaCorrect)
7133 This resource, if true, will lighten or darken an image of
7134 known gamma to match the gamma of the display (see resource dis‐
7135 playGamma). The default is True.
7136
7137 geometry (class Geometry)
7138 Specifies the preferred size and position of the image window.
7139 It is not necessarily obeyed by all window managers.
7140
7141 Offsets, if present, are handled in X(1) style. A negative x
7142 offset is measured from the right edge of the screen to the
7143 right edge of the icon, and a negative y offset is measured from
7144 the bottom edge of the screen to the bottom edge of the icon.
7145
7146 iconGeometry (class IconGeometry)
7147 Specifies the preferred size and position of the application
7148 when iconified. It is not necessarily obeyed by all window man‐
7149 agers.
7150
7151 Offsets, if present, are handled in the same manner as in class
7152 Geometry.
7153
7154 iconic (class Iconic)
7155 This resource indicates that you would prefer that the applica‐
7156 tion's windows initially not be visible as if the windows had be
7157 immediately iconified by you. Window managers may choose not to
7158 honor the application's request.
7159
7160 magnify (class Magnify)
7161 specifies an integral factor by which the image should be
7162 enlarged. The default is 3. This value only affects the magni‐
7163 fication window which is invoked with button number 3 after the
7164 image is displayed.
7165
7166 matteColor (class MatteColor)
7167 Specify the color of windows. It is used for the backgrounds of
7168 windows, menus, and notices. A 3D effect is achieved by using
7169 highlight and shadow colors derived from this color. Default
7170 value: #697B8F.
7171
7172 name (class Name)
7173 This resource specifies the name under which resources for the
7174 application should be found. This resource is useful in shell
7175 aliases to distinguish between invocations of an application,
7176 without resorting to creating links to alter the executable file
7177 name. The default is the application name.
7178
7179 pen[1-9] (class Pen[1-9])
7180 Specifies the color of the preferred font to use when annotat‐
7181 ing the image window with text. The default colors are black,
7182 blue, green, cyan, gray, red, magenta, yellow, and white.
7183
7184 printCommand (class PrintCommand)
7185 This command is executed whenever Print is issued. In general,
7186 it is the command to print PostScript to your printer. Default
7187 value: lp -c -s %i.
7188
7189 sharedMemory (class SharedMemory)
7190 This resource specifies whether display should attempt use
7191 shared memory for pixmaps. GraphicsMagick must be compiled with
7192 shared memory support, and the display must support the MIT-SHM
7193 extension. Otherwise, this resource is ignored. The default is
7194 True.
7195
7196 textFont (class textFont)
7197 Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in fixed (type‐
7198 writer style) formatted text. The default is 14 point Courier.
7199
7200 title (class Title)
7201 This resource specifies the title to be used for the image win‐
7202 dow. This information is sometimes used by a window manager to
7203 provide a header identifying the window. The default is the
7204 image file name.
7205
7206 undoCache (class UndoCache)
7207 Specifies, in mega-bytes, the amount of memory in the undo edit
7208 cache. Each time you modify the image it is saved in the undo
7209 edit cache as long as memory is available. You can subsequently
7210 undo one or more of these transformations. The default is 16
7211 Megabytes.
7212
7213 usePixmap (class UsePixmap)
7214 Images are maintained as a XImage by default. Set this resource
7215 to True to utilize a server Pixmap instead. This option is use‐
7216 ful if your image exceeds the dimensions of your server screen
7217 and you intend to pan the image. Panning is much faster with
7218 Pixmaps than with a XImage. Pixmaps are considered a precious
7219 resource, use them with discretion.
7220
7221 To set the geometry of the Magnify or Pan or window, use the
7222 geometry resource. For example, to set the Pan window geometry
7223 to 256x256, use:
7224
7225 gm display.pan.geometry: 256x256
7226
7227
7229 To select an image to display, choose Open of the File sub-menu from
7230 the Command widget. A file browser is displayed. To choose a particu‐
7231 lar image file, move the pointer to the filename and press any button.
7232 The filename is copied to the text window. Next, press Open or press
7233 the RETURN key. Alternatively, you can type the image file name
7234 directly into the text window. To descend directories, choose a direc‐
7235 tory name and press the button twice quickly. A scrollbar allows a
7236 large list of filenames to be moved through the viewing area if it
7237 exceeds the size of the list area.
7238
7239 You can trim the list of file names by using shell globbing characters.
7240 For example, type *.jpg to list only files that end with .jpg.
7241
7242 To select your image from the X server screen instead of from a file,
7243 Choose Grab of the Open widget.
7244
7246 To create a Visual Image Directory, choose Visual Directory of the File
7247 sub-menu from the Command widget . A file browser is displayed. To cre‐
7248 ate a Visual Image Directory from all the images in the current direc‐
7249 tory, press Directory or press the RETURN key. Alternatively, you can
7250 select a set of image names by using shell globbing characters. For
7251 example, type *.jpg to include only files that end with .jpg. To
7252 descend directories, choose a directory name and press the button twice
7253 quickly. A scrollbar allows a large list of filenames to be moved
7254 through the viewing area if it exceeds the size of the list area.
7255
7256 After you select a set of files, they are turned into thumbnails and
7257 tiled onto a single image. Now move the pointer to a particular thumb‐
7258 nail and press button 3 and drag. Finally, select Open. The image rep‐
7259 resented by the thumbnail is displayed at its full size. Choose Next
7260 from the File sub-menu of the Command widget to return to the Visual
7261 Image Directory.
7262
7264 Note that cut information for image window is not retained for col‐
7265 ormapped X server visuals (e.g. StaticColor, StaticColor, GRAYScale,
7266 PseudoColor). Correct cutting behavior may require a TrueColor or
7267 DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
7268
7269 To begin, press choose Cut of the Edit sub-menu from the Command wid‐
7270 get. Alternatively, press F3 in the image window.
7271
7272 A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7273 window. You are now in cut mode. In cut mode, the Command widget has
7274 these options:
7275
7276 Help
7277 Dismiss
7278
7279
7280 To define a cut region, press button 1 and drag. The cut region is
7281 defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as it fol‐
7282 lows the pointer. Once you are satisfied with the cut region, release
7283 the button. You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode, the Command
7284 widget has these options:
7285
7286 Cut
7287 Help
7288 Dismiss
7289
7290
7291 You can make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the cut rec‐
7292 tangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Cut to
7293 commit your copy region. To exit without cutting the image, press Dis‐
7294 miss.
7295
7297 To begin, press choose Copy of the Edit sub-menu from the Command wid‐
7298 get. Alternatively, press F4 in the image window.
7299
7300 A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7301 window. You are now in copy mode. In copy mode, the Command widget has
7302 these options:
7303
7304 Help
7305 Dismiss
7306
7307
7308 To define a copy region, press button 1 and drag. The copy region is
7309 defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as it fol‐
7310 lows the pointer. Once you are satisfied with the copy region, release
7311 the button. You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode, the Command
7312 widget has these options:
7313
7314 Copy
7315 Help
7316 Dismiss
7317
7318
7319 You can make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the copy rec‐
7320 tangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Copy to
7321 commit your copy region. To exit without copying the image, press Dis‐
7322 miss.
7323
7325 To begin, press choose Paste of the Edit sub-menu from the Command wid‐
7326 get. Alternatively, press F5 in the image window.
7327
7328 A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7329 window. You are now in Paste mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.
7330 In Paste mode, the Command widget has these options:
7331
7332 Operators
7333
7334 over
7335 in
7336 out
7337 atop
7338 xor
7339 plus
7340 minus
7341 add
7342 subtract
7343 difference
7344 multiply
7345 bumpmap
7346 replace
7347
7348 Help
7349 Dismiss
7350
7351
7352 Choose a composite operation from the Operators sub-menu of the Command
7353 widget. How each operator behaves is described below. image window is
7354 the image currently displayed on your X server and image is the image
7355 obtained with the File Browser widget.
7356
7357 over The result is the union of the two image shapes, with image
7358 obscuring image window in the region of overlap.
7359
7360 in The result is simply image cut by the shape of image window.
7361 None of the image data of image window is in the result.
7362
7363 out The resulting image is image with the shape of image window cut
7364 out.
7365
7366 atop The result is the same shape as image window, with image
7367 obscuring image window where the image shapes overlap. Note this
7368 differs from over because the portion of image outside image
7369 window's shape does not appear in the result.
7370
7371 xor The result is the image data from both image and image window
7372 that is outside the overlap region. The overlap region is blank.
7373
7374 plus The result is just the sum of the image data. Output values are
7375 cropped to the maximum value (no overflow). This operation is
7376 independent of the matte channels.
7377
7378 minus The result of image - image window, with underflow cropped to
7379 zero. The matte channel is ignored (set to opaque, full cover‐
7380 age).
7381
7382 add The result of image + image window, with overflow wrapping
7383 around (mod MaxRGB+1).
7384
7385 subtract
7386 The result of image - image window, with underflow wrapping
7387 around (mod MaxRGB+1). The add and subtract operators can be
7388 used to perform reversible transformations.
7389
7390 difference
7391 The result of abs(image - image window). This is useful for
7392 comparing two very similar images.
7393
7394 multiply
7395 The result of image * image window. This is useful for the cre‐
7396 ation of drop-shadows.
7397
7398 bumpmap
7399 The result of image window shaded by window.
7400
7401 replace
7402 The resulting image is image window replaced with image. Here
7403 the matte information is ignored.
7404
7405 The image compositor requires a matte, or alpha channel in the
7406 image for some operations. This extra channel usually defines a
7407 mask which represents a sort of a cookie-cutter for the image.
7408 This is the case when matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels
7409 inside the shape, zero outside, and between zero and 255 on the
7410 boundary. If image does not have a matte channel, it is initial‐
7411 ized with 0 for any pixel matching in color to pixel location
7412 (0,0), otherwise 255. See Matte Editing for a method of defining
7413 a matte channel.
7414
7415 Note that matte information for image window is not retained for
7416 colormapped X server visuals (e.g. StaticColor, StaticColor,
7417 GrayScale, PseudoColor). Correct compositing behavior may
7418 require a TrueColor or DirectColor visual or a Standard Col‐
7419 ormap.
7420
7421 Choosing a composite operator is optional. The default operator
7422 is replace. However, you must choose a location to composite
7423 your image and press button 1. Press and hold the button before
7424 releasing and an outline of the image will appear to help you
7425 identify your location.
7426
7427 The actual colors of the pasted image is saved. However, the
7428 color that appears in image window may be different. For exam‐
7429 ple, on a monochrome screen image window will appear black or
7430 white even though your pasted image may have many colors. If the
7431 image is saved to a file it is written with the correct colors.
7432 To assure the correct colors are saved in the final image, any
7433 PseudoClass image is promoted to DirectClass. To force a Pseu‐
7434 doClass image to remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7435
7437 To begin, press choose Crop of the Transform submenu from the Command
7438 widget. Alternatively, press C in the image window.
7439
7440 A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7441 window. You are now in crop mode. In crop mode, the Command widget has
7442 these options:
7443
7444 Help
7445 Dismiss
7446
7447
7448 To define a cropping region, press button 1 and drag. The cropping
7449 region is defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts
7450 as it follows the pointer. Once you are satisfied with the cropping
7451 region, release the button. You are now in rectify mode. In rectify
7452 mode, the Command widget has these options:
7453
7454 Crop
7455 Help
7456 Dismiss
7457
7458
7459 You can make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the cropping
7460 rectangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Crop
7461 to commit your cropping region. To exit without cropping the image,
7462 press Dismiss.
7463
7465 An image is chopped interactively. There is no command line argument to
7466 chop an image. To begin, choose Chop of the Transform sub-menu from the
7467 Command widget. Alternatively, press [ in the Image window.
7468
7469 You are now in Chop mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss. In Chop
7470 mode, the Command widget has these options:
7471
7472 Direction
7473
7474 horizontal
7475 vertical
7476
7477 Help
7478 Dismiss
7479
7480
7481 If the you choose the horizontal direction (this is the default), the
7482 area of the image between the two horizontal endpoints of the chop line
7483 is removed. Otherwise, the area of the image between the two vertical
7484 endpoints of the chop line is removed.
7485
7486 Select a location within the image window to begin your chop, press and
7487 hold any button. Next, move the pointer to another location in the
7488 image. As you move a line will connect the initial location and the
7489 pointer. When you release the button, the area within the image to chop
7490 is determined by which direction you choose from the Command widget.
7491
7492 To cancel the image chopping, move the pointer back to the starting
7493 point of the line and release the button.
7494
7496 Press the / key to rotate the image 90 degrees or \ to rotate -90
7497 degrees. To interactively choose the degree of rotation, choose
7498 Rotate... of the Transform submenu from the Command Widget. Alterna‐
7499 tively, press * in the image window.
7500
7501 A small horizontal line is drawn next to the pointer. You are now in
7502 rotate mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss. In rotate mode, the
7503 Command widget has these options:
7504
7505 Pixel Color
7506
7507 black
7508 blue
7509 cyan
7510 green
7511 gray
7512 red
7513 magenta
7514 yellow
7515 white
7516 Browser...
7517
7518 Direction
7519
7520 horizontal
7521 vertical
7522
7523 Help
7524 Dismiss
7525
7526
7527 Choose a background color from the Pixel Color sub-menu. Additional
7528 background colors can be specified with the color browser. You can
7529 change the menu colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7530
7531 If you choose the color browser and press Grab, you can select the
7532 background color by moving the pointer to the desired color on the
7533 screen and press any button.
7534
7535 Choose a point in the image window and press this button and hold.
7536 Next, move the pointer to another location in the image. As you move a
7537 line connects the initial location and the pointer. When you release
7538 the button, the degree of image rotation is determined by the slope of
7539 the line you just drew. The slope is relative to the direction you
7540 choose from the Direction sub-menu of the Command widget.
7541
7542 To cancel the image rotation, move the pointer back to the starting
7543 point of the line and release the button.
7544
7546 An image is annotated interactively. There is no command line argument
7547 to annotate an image. To begin, choose Annotate of the Image Edit sub-
7548 menu from the Command widget. Alternatively, press a in the image win‐
7549 dow.
7550
7551 A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7552 window. You are now in annotate mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7553 miss. In annotate mode, the Command widget has these options:
7554
7555
7556 Font Name
7557
7558
7559 fixed
7560
7561 variable
7562
7563 5x8
7564
7565 6x10
7566
7567 7x13bold
7568
7569 8x13bold
7570
7571 9x15bold
7572
7573 10x20
7574
7575 12x24
7576
7577 Browser...
7578
7579
7580 Font Color
7581
7582
7583 black
7584
7585 blue
7586
7587 cyan
7588
7589 green
7590
7591 gray
7592
7593 red
7594
7595 magenta
7596
7597 yellow
7598
7599 white
7600
7601 transparent
7602
7603 Browser...
7604
7605
7606 Box Color
7607
7608
7609 black
7610
7611 blue
7612
7613 cyan
7614
7615 green
7616
7617 gray
7618
7619 red
7620
7621 magenta
7622
7623 yellow
7624
7625 white
7626
7627 transparent
7628
7629 Browser...
7630
7631
7632 Rotate Text
7633
7634
7635 -90
7636
7637 -45
7638
7639 -30
7640
7641 0
7642
7643 30
7644
7645 45
7646
7647 90
7648
7649 180
7650
7651 Dialog...
7652
7653
7654 Help
7655
7656 Dismiss
7657
7658
7659 Choose a font name from the Font Name sub-menu. Additional font names
7660 can be specified with the font browser. You can change the menu names
7661 by setting the X resources font1 through font9.
7662
7663 Choose a font color from the Font Color sub-menu. Additional font col‐
7664 ors can be specified with the color browser. You can change the menu
7665 colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7666
7667 If you select the color browser and press Grab, you can choose the font
7668 color by moving the pointer to the desired color on the screen and
7669 press any button.
7670
7671 If you choose to rotate the text, choose Rotate Text from the menu and
7672 select an angle. Typically you will only want to rotate one line of
7673 text at a time. Depending on the angle you choose, subsequent lines may
7674 end up overwriting each other.
7675
7676 Choosing a font and its color is optional. The default font is fixed
7677 and the default color is black. However, you must choose a location to
7678 begin entering text and press a button. An underscore character will
7679 appear at the location of the pointer. The cursor changes to a pencil
7680 to indicate you are in text mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.
7681
7682 In text mode, any key presses will display the character at the loca‐
7683 tion of the underscore and advance the underscore cursor. Enter your
7684 text and once completed press Apply to finish your image annotation. To
7685 correct errors press BACK SPACE. To delete an entire line of text,
7686 press DELETE. Any text that exceeds the boundaries of the image window
7687 is automatically continued onto the next line.
7688
7689 The actual color you request for the font is saved in the image. How‐
7690 ever, the color that appears in your Image window may be different. For
7691 example, on a monochrome screen the text will appear black or white
7692 even if you choose the color red as the font color. However, the image
7693 saved to a file with -write is written with red lettering. To assure
7694 the correct color text in the final image, any PseudoClass image is
7695 promoted to DirectClass (see miff(5)). To force a PseudoClass image to
7696 remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7697
7699 An image composite is created interactively. There is no command line
7700 argument to composite an image. To begin, choose Composite of the Image
7701 Edit from the Command widget. Alternatively, press x in the Image win‐
7702 dow.
7703
7704 First a popup window is displayed requesting you to enter an image
7705 name. Press Composite, Grab or type a file name. Press Cancel if you
7706 choose not to create a composite image. When you choose Grab, move the
7707 pointer to the desired window and press any button.
7708
7709 If the Composite image does not have any matte information, you are
7710 informed and the file browser is displayed again. Enter the name of a
7711 mask image. The image is typically grayscale and the same size as the
7712 composite image. If the image is not grayscale, it is converted to
7713 grayscale and the resulting intensities are used as matte information.
7714
7715 A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7716 window. You are now in composite mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7717 miss. In composite mode, the Command widget has these options:
7718
7719
7720 Operators
7721
7722
7723 over
7724
7725 in
7726
7727 out
7728
7729 atop
7730
7731 xor
7732
7733 plus
7734
7735 minus
7736
7737 add
7738
7739 subtract
7740
7741 difference
7742
7743 bumpmap
7744
7745 replace
7746
7747
7748 Blend
7749
7750 Displace
7751
7752 Help
7753
7754 Dismiss
7755
7756
7757 Choose a composite operation from the Operators sub-menu of the Command
7758 widget. How each operator behaves is described below. image window is
7759 the image currently displayed on your X server and image is the image
7760 obtained
7761
7762 over The result is the union of the two image shapes, with image
7763 obscuring image window in the region of overlap.
7764
7765 in The result is simply image cut by the shape of image window.
7766 None of the image data of image window is in the result.
7767
7768 out The resulting image is image with the shape of image window cut
7769 out.
7770
7771 atop The result is the same shape as image window, with image
7772 obscuring image window where the image shapes overlap. Note this
7773 differs from over because the portion of image outside image
7774 window's shape does not appear in the result.
7775
7776 xor The result is the image data from both image and image window
7777 that is outside the overlap region. The overlap region is blank.
7778
7779 plus The result is just the sum of the image data. Output values are
7780 cropped to 255 (no overflow). This operation is independent of
7781 the matte channels.
7782
7783 minus The result of image - image window, with underflow cropped to
7784 zero. The matte channel is ignored (set to 255, full coverage).
7785
7786 add The result of image + image window, with overflow wrapping
7787 around (mod 256).
7788
7789 subtract
7790 The result of image - image window, with underflow wrapping
7791 around (mod 256). The add and subtract operators can be used to
7792 perform reversible transformations.
7793
7794 difference
7795 The result of abs(image - image window). This is useful for
7796 comparing two very similar images.
7797
7798 bumpmap
7799 The result of image window shaded by window.
7800
7801 replace
7802 The resulting image is image window replaced with image. Here
7803 the matte information is ignored.
7804
7805 The image compositor requires a matte, or alpha channel in the
7806 image for some operations. This extra channel usually defines a
7807 mask which represents a sort of a cookie-cutter for the image.
7808 This is the case when matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels
7809 inside the shape, zero outside, and between zero and 255 on the
7810 boundary. If image does not have a matte channel, it is initial‐
7811 ized with 0 for any pixel matching in color to pixel location
7812 (0,0), otherwise 255. See Matte Editing for a method of defining
7813 a matte channel.
7814
7815 If you choose blend, the composite operator becomes over. The
7816 image matte channel percent transparency is initialized to fac‐
7817 tor. The image window is initialized to (100-factor). Where
7818 factor is the value you specify in the Dialog widget.
7819
7820 Displace shifts the image pixels as defined by a displacement
7821 map. With this option, image is used as a displacement map.
7822 Black, within the displacement map, is a maximum positive dis‐
7823 placement. White is a maximum negative displacement and middle
7824 gray is neutral. The displacement is scaled to determine the
7825 pixel shift. By default, the displacement applies in both the
7826 horizontal and vertical directions. However, if you specify
7827 mask, image is the horizontal X displacement and mask the verti‐
7828 cal Y displacement.
7829
7830 Note that matte information for image window is not retained for
7831 colormapped X server visuals (e.g. StaticColor, StaticColor,
7832 GrayScale, PseudoColor). Correct compositing behavior may
7833 require a TrueColor or DirectColor visual or a Standard Col‐
7834 ormap.
7835
7836 Choosing a composite operator is optional. The default operator
7837 is replace. However, you must choose a location to composite
7838 your image and press button 1. Press and hold the button before
7839 releasing and an outline of the image will appear to help you
7840 identify your location.
7841
7842 The actual colors of the composite image is saved. However, the
7843 color that appears in image window may be different. For exam‐
7844 ple, on a monochrome screen Image window will appear black or
7845 white even though your composited image may have many colors. If
7846 the image is saved to a file it is written with the correct col‐
7847 ors. To assure the correct colors are saved in the final image,
7848 any PseudoClass image is promoted to DirectClass (see miff). To
7849 force a PseudoClass image to remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7850
7852 Changing the the color of a set of pixels is performed interactively.
7853 There is no command line argument to edit a pixel. To begin, choose
7854 Color from the Image Edit submenu of the Command widget. Alterna‐
7855 tively, press c in the image window.
7856
7857 A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7858 window. You are now in color edit mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7859 miss. In color edit mode, the Command widget has these options:
7860
7861
7862 Method
7863
7864
7865 point
7866
7867 replace
7868
7869 floodfill
7870
7871 reset
7872
7873
7874 Pixel Color
7875
7876
7877 black
7878
7879 blue
7880
7881 cyan
7882
7883 green
7884
7885 gray
7886
7887 red
7888
7889 magenta
7890
7891 yellow
7892
7893 white
7894
7895 Browser...
7896
7897
7898 Border Color
7899
7900
7901 black
7902
7903 blue
7904
7905 cyan
7906
7907 green
7908
7909 gray
7910
7911 red
7912
7913 magenta
7914
7915 yellow
7916
7917 white
7918
7919 Browser...
7920
7921
7922 Fuzz
7923
7924
7925 0
7926
7927 2
7928
7929 4
7930
7931 8
7932
7933 16
7934 Dialog...
7935
7936
7937 Undo
7938
7939 Help
7940
7941 Dismiss
7942
7943
7944 Choose a color editing method from the Method sub-menu of the Command
7945 widget. The point method recolors any pixel selected with the pointer
7946 unless the button is released. The replace method recolors any pixel
7947 that matches the color of the pixel you select with a button press.
7948 Floodfill recolors any pixel that matches the color of the pixel you
7949 select with a button press and is a neighbor. Whereas filltoborder
7950 changes the matte value of any neighbor pixel that is not the border
7951 color. Finally reset changes the entire image to the designated color.
7952
7953 Next, choose a pixel color from the Pixel Color sub-menu. Additional
7954 pixel colors can be specified with the color browser. You can change
7955 the menu colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7956
7957 Now press button 1 to select a pixel within the Image window to change
7958 its color. Additional pixels may be recolored as prescribed by the
7959 method you choose. additional pixels by increasing the Delta value.
7960
7961 If the Magnify widget is mapped, it can be helpful in positioning your
7962 pointer within the image (refer to button 2). Alternatively you can
7963 select a pixel to recolor from within the Magnify widget. Move the
7964 pointer to the Magnify widget and position the pixel with the cursor
7965 control keys. Finally, press a button to recolor the selected pixel (or
7966 pixels).
7967
7968 The actual color you request for the pixels is saved in the image. How‐
7969 ever, the color that appears in your Image window may be different. For
7970 example, on a monochrome screen the pixel will appear black or white
7971 even if you choose the color red as the pixel color. However, the image
7972 saved to a file with -write is written with red pixels. To assure the
7973 correct color text in the final image, any PseudoClass image is pro‐
7974 moted to DirectClass To force a PseudoClass image to remain Pseudo‐
7975 Class, use -colors.
7976
7978 Matte information within an image is useful for some operations such as
7979 image compositing. This extra channel usually defines a mask which rep‐
7980 resents a sort of a cookie-cutter for the image. This is the case when
7981 matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels inside the shape, zero outside,
7982 and between zero and 255 on the boundary.
7983
7984 Setting the matte information in an image is done interactively. There
7985 is no command line argument to edit a pixel. To begin, and choose Matte
7986 of the Image Edit sub-menu from the Command widget.
7987
7988 Alternatively, press m in the image window.
7989
7990 A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7991 window. You are now in matte edit mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7992 miss. In matte edit mode, the Command widget has these options:
7993
7994
7995 Method
7996
7997
7998 point
7999
8000 replace
8001
8002 floodfill
8003
8004 reset
8005
8006
8007 Border Color
8008
8009
8010 black
8011
8012 blue
8013
8014 cyan
8015
8016 green
8017
8018 gray
8019
8020 red
8021
8022 magenta
8023
8024 yellow
8025
8026 white
8027
8028 Browser...
8029
8030
8031 Fuzz
8032
8033
8034 0
8035
8036 2
8037
8038 4
8039
8040 8
8041
8042 16
8043 Dialog...
8044
8045
8046 Matte
8047
8048 Undo
8049
8050 Help
8051
8052 Dismiss
8053
8054 Choose a matte editing method from the Method sub-menu of the Command
8055 widget. The point method changes the matte value of the any pixel
8056 selected with the pointer until the button is released. The replace
8057 method changes the matte value of any pixel that matches the color of
8058 the pixel you select with a button press. Floodfill changes the matte
8059 value of any pixel that matches the color of the pixel you select with
8060 a button press and is a neighbor. Whereas filltoborder recolors any
8061 neighbor pixel that is not the border color. Finally reset changes the
8062 entire image to the designated matte value. Choose Matte Value and a
8063 dialog appears requesting a matte value. Enter a value between 0 and
8064 255. This value is assigned as the matte value of the selected pixel or
8065 pixels. Now, press any button to select a pixel within the Image win‐
8066 dow to change its matte value. You can change the matte value of addi‐
8067 tional pixels by increasing the Delta value. The Delta value is first
8068 added then subtracted from the red, green, and blue of the target
8069 color. Any pixels within the range also have their matte value updated.
8070 If the Magnify widget is mapped, it can be helpful in positioning your
8071 pointer within the image (refer to button 2). Alternatively you can
8072 select a pixel to change the matte value from within the Magnify wid‐
8073 get. Move the pointer to the Magnify widget and position the pixel
8074 with the cursor control keys. Finally, press a button to change the
8075 matte value of the selected pixel (or pixels). Matte information is
8076 only valid in a DirectClass image. Therefore, any PseudoClass image is
8077 promoted to DirectClass. Note that matte information for PseudoClass is
8078 not retained for colormapped X server visuals (e.g. StaticColor, Stat‐
8079 icColor, GrayScale, PseudoColor) unless you immediately save your image
8080 to a file (refer to Write). Correct matte editing behavior may require
8081 a TrueColor or DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
8082
8084 An image is drawn upon interactively. There is no command line argument
8085 to draw on an image. To begin, choose Draw of the Image Edit sub-menu
8086 from the Command widget. Alternatively, press d in the image window.
8087
8088 The cursor changes to a crosshair to indicate you are in draw mode. To
8089 exit immediately, press Dismiss. In draw mode, the Command widget has
8090 these options:
8091
8092
8093 Primitive
8094
8095
8096 point
8097
8098 line
8099
8100 rectangle
8101
8102 fill rectangle
8103
8104 circle
8105
8106 fill circle
8107
8108 ellipse
8109
8110 fill ellipse
8111
8112 polygon
8113
8114 fill polygon
8115
8116
8117 Color
8118
8119
8120 black
8121
8122 blue
8123
8124 cyan
8125
8126 green
8127
8128 gray
8129
8130 red
8131
8132 magenta
8133
8134 yellow
8135
8136 white
8137
8138 transparent
8139
8140 Browser...
8141
8142
8143 Stipple
8144
8145
8146 Brick
8147
8148 Diagonal
8149
8150 Scales
8151
8152 Vertical
8153
8154 Wavy
8155
8156 Translucent
8157
8158 Opaque
8159
8160 Open...
8161
8162
8163 Width
8164
8165
8166 1
8167
8168 2
8169
8170 4
8171
8172 8
8173
8174 16
8175 Dialog...
8176
8177
8178 Undo
8179
8180 Help
8181
8182 Dismiss
8183
8184 Choose a drawing primitive from the Primitive sub-menu.
8185
8186 Next, choose a color from the Color sub-menu. Additional colors can be
8187 specified with the color browser. You can change the menu colors by
8188 setting the X resources pen1 through pen9. The transparent color
8189 updates the image matte channel and is useful for image compositing.
8190
8191 If you choose the color browser and press Grab, you can select the
8192 primitive color by moving the pointer to the desired color on the
8193 screen and press any button. The transparent color updates the image
8194 matte channel and is useful for image compositing.
8195
8196 Choose a stipple, if appropriate, from the Stipple sub-menu. Additional
8197 stipples can be specified with the file browser. Stipples obtained from
8198 the file browser must be on disk in the X11 bitmap format.
8199
8200 Choose a line width, if appropriate, from the Width sub-menu. To choose
8201 a specific width select the Dialog widget.
8202
8203 Choose a point in the image window and press button 1 and hold. Next,
8204 move the pointer to another location in the image. As you move, a line
8205 connects the initial location and the pointer. When you release the
8206 button, the image is updated with the primitive you just drew. For
8207 polygons, the image is updated when you press and release the button
8208 without moving the pointer.
8209
8210 To cancel image drawing, move the pointer back to the starting point of
8211 the line and release the button.
8212
8214 To begin, press choose Region of Interest of the Pixel Transform sub-
8215 menu from the Command widget. Alternatively, press R in the image win‐
8216 dow.
8217
8218 A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
8219 window. You are now in region of interest mode. In region of interest
8220 mode, the Command widget has these options:
8221
8222
8223 Help
8224
8225 Dismiss
8226
8227
8228 To define a region of interest, press button 1 and drag. The region of
8229 interest is defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or con‐
8230 tracts as it follows the pointer. Once you are satisfied with the
8231 region of interest, release the button. You are now in apply mode. In
8232 apply mode the Command widget has these options:
8233
8234
8235 File
8236
8237
8238 Save...
8239
8240 Print...
8241
8242
8243 Edit
8244
8245
8246 Undo
8247
8248 Redo
8249
8250
8251 Transform
8252
8253
8254 Flip
8255
8256 Flop
8257
8258 Rotate Right
8259
8260 Rotate Left
8261
8262
8263 Enhance
8264
8265
8266 Hue...
8267
8268 Saturation...
8269
8270 Brightness...
8271
8272 Gamma...
8273
8274 Spiff
8275
8276 Dull
8277
8278 Equalize
8279
8280 Normalize
8281
8282 Negate
8283
8284 GRAYscale
8285
8286 Quantize...
8287
8288
8289 Effects
8290
8291
8292 Despeckle
8293
8294 Emboss
8295
8296 Reduce Noise
8297
8298 Add Noise
8299
8300 Sharpen...
8301
8302 Blur...
8303
8304 Threshold...
8305
8306 Edge Detect...
8307
8308 Spread...
8309
8310 Shade...
8311
8312 Raise...
8313
8314 Segment...
8315
8316
8317
8318
8319 F/X
8320
8321
8322 Solarize...
8323
8324 Swirl...
8325
8326 Implode...
8327
8328 Wave...
8329
8330 Oil Paint
8331
8332 Charcoal Draw...
8333
8334
8335
8336
8337 Miscellany
8338
8339
8340 Image Info
8341
8342 Zoom Image
8343
8344 Show Preview...
8345
8346 Show Histogram
8347
8348 Show Matte
8349
8350
8351 Help
8352
8353 Dismiss
8354
8355
8356 You can make adjustments to the region of interest by moving the
8357 pointer to one of the rectangle corners, pressing a button, and drag‐
8358 ging. Finally, choose an image processing technique from the Command
8359 widget. You can choose more than one image processing technique to
8360 apply to an area. Alternatively, you can move the region of interest
8361 before applying another image processing technique. To exit, press Dis‐
8362 miss.
8363
8365 When an image exceeds the width or height of the X server screen, dis‐
8366 play maps a small panning icon. The rectangle within the panning icon
8367 shows the area that is currently displayed in the the image window. To
8368 pan about the image, press any button and drag the pointer within the
8369 panning icon. The pan rectangle moves with the pointer and the image
8370 window is updated to reflect the location of the rectangle within the
8371 panning icon. When you have selected the area of the image you wish to
8372 view, release the button.
8373
8374 Use the arrow keys to pan the image one pixel up, down, left, or right
8375 within the image window.
8376
8377 The panning icon is withdrawn if the image becomes smaller than the
8378 dimensions of the X server screen.
8379
8381 Preferences affect the default behavior of display(1). The preferences
8382 are either true or false and are stored in your home directory as .dis‐
8383 playrc:
8384
8385 display image centered on a backdrop"
8386
8387
8388 This backdrop covers the entire workstation screen and is
8389 useful for hiding other X window activity while viewing
8390 the image. The color of the backdrop is specified as the
8391 background color. Refer to X Resources for details.
8392 confirm on program exit"
8393
8394
8395 Ask for a confirmation before exiting the display(1) pro‐
8396 gram.
8397 correct image for display gamma"
8398
8399
8400 If the image has a known gamma, the gamma is corrected to
8401 match that of the X server (see the X Resource dis‐
8402 playGamma).
8403 display warning messages"
8404
8405
8406 Display any warning messages.
8407 apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to image"
8408
8409
8410 The basic strategy of dithering is to trade intensity res‐
8411 olution for spatial resolution by averaging the intensi‐
8412 ties of several neighboring pixels. Images which suffer
8413 from severe contouring when reducing colors can be
8414 improved with this preference.
8415 use a shared colormap for colormapped X visuals"
8416
8417
8418 This option only applies when the default X server visual
8419 is PseudoColor or GRAYScale. Refer to -visual for more
8420 details. By default, a shared colormap is allocated. The
8421 image shares colors with other X clients. Some image col‐
8422 ors could be approximated, therefore your image may look
8423 very different than intended. Otherwise the image colors
8424 appear exactly as they are defined. However, other clients
8425 may go technicolor when the image colormap is installed.
8426 display images as an X server pixmap"
8427
8428
8429 Images are maintained as a XImage by default. Set this
8430 resource to True to utilize a server Pixmap instead. This
8431 option is useful if your image exceeds the dimensions of
8432 your server screen and you intend to pan the image. Pan‐
8433 ning is much faster with Pixmaps than with a XImage.
8434 Pixmaps are considered a precious resource, use them with
8435 discretion.
8436
8437
8438
8439 GM IDENTIFY
8440
8441 Identify describes the format and characteristics of one or more
8442 image files as internally supported by the software. It will
8443 also report if an image is incomplete or corrupt. The informa‐
8444 tion displayed includes the scene number, the file name, the
8445 width and height of the image, whether the image is colormapped
8446 or not, the number of colors in the image, the number of bytes
8447 in the image, the format of the image (JPEG, PNM, etc.), and
8448 finally the number of seconds in both user time and elapsed time
8449 it took to read and process the image. If -verbose or +ping are
8450 provided as an option, the pixel read rate is also displayed. An
8451 example line output from identify follows:
8452
8453 images/aquarium.miff 640x480 PseudoClass 256c
8454 308135b MIFF 0.000u 0:01
8455
8456
8457 If -verbose is set, expect additional output including any image
8458 comment:
8459
8460
8461 Image: images/aquarium.miff
8462 class: PseudoClass
8463 colors: 256
8464 signature: eb5dca81dd93ae7e6ffae99a527eb5dca8...
8465 matte: False
8466 geometry: 640x480
8467 depth: 8
8468 bytes: 308135
8469 format: MIFF
8470 comments:
8471 Imported from MTV raster image: aquarium.mtv
8472
8473
8474 For some formats, additional format-specific information about
8475 the file will be written if the -debug coder or -debug all
8476 option is used.
8477
8479 Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
8480 the command line remains in effect for the set of images immediately
8481 following, until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option
8482 or -noop.
8483
8484 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8485
8486
8487 -authenticate <string>
8488 decrypt image with this password
8489
8490 -debug <events>
8491 enable debug printout
8492
8493 -define <key>{=<value>},...
8494 add coder/decoder specific options
8495
8496 -density <width>x<height>
8497 horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8498
8499 -depth <value>
8500 depth of the image
8501
8502 -format <string>
8503 output formatted image characteristics
8504
8505 -help print usage instructions
8506
8507 -interlace <type>
8508 the type of interlacing scheme
8509
8510 -limit <type> <value>
8511 Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height or Threads
8512 resource limit
8513
8514 -log <string>
8515 Specify format for debug log
8516
8517 -ping efficiently determine image characteristics
8518
8519 -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8520 chroma subsampling factors
8521
8522 -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
8523 width and height of the image
8524
8525 -verbose
8526 print detailed information about the image
8527
8528 -version
8529 print GraphicsMagick version string
8530
8531 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options,
8532 above.
8533
8534
8536 Import reads an image from any visible window on an X server and out‐
8537 puts it as an image file. You can capture a single window, the entire
8538 screen, or any rectangular portion of the screen. Use display for
8539 redisplay, printing, editing, formatting, archiving, image processing,
8540 etc. of the captured image.
8541
8542 The target window can be specified by id, name, or may be selected by
8543 clicking the mouse in the desired window. If you press a button and
8544 then drag, a rectangle will form which expands and contracts as the
8545 mouse moves. To save the portion of the screen defined by the rectan‐
8546 gle, just release the button. The keyboard bell is rung once at the
8547 beginning of the screen capture and twice when it completes.
8548
8550 To select an X window or an area of the screen with the mouse and save
8551 it in the MIFF image format to a file entitled window.miff, use:
8552
8553 gm import window.miff
8554
8555
8556 To select an X window or an area of the screen with the mouse and save
8557 it in the Encapsulated PostScript format to include in another docu‐
8558 ment, use:
8559
8560 gm import figure.eps
8561
8562
8563 To capture the entire X server screen in the JPEG image format in a
8564 file entitled root.jpeg, without using the mouse, use:
8565
8566 gm import -window root root.jpeg
8567
8568
8569 To capture the 512x256 area at the upper right corner of the X server
8570 screen in the PNG image format in a well-compressed file entitled cor‐
8571 ner.png, without using the mouse, use:
8572
8573 gm import -window root -crop 512x256-0+0 -quality 90
8574 corner.png
8575
8576
8578 Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
8579 the command line remains in effect until it is explicitly changed by
8580 specifying the option again with a different effect.
8581
8582 Import options can appear on the command line or in your X resources
8583 file. See X(1). Options on the command line supersede values specified
8584 in your X resources file.
8585
8586 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8587
8588
8589 -bordercolor <color>
8590 the border color
8591
8592 -colors <value>
8593 preferred number of colors in the image
8594
8595 -colorspace <value>
8596 the type of colorspace
8597
8598 -comment <string>
8599 annotate an image with a comment
8600
8601 -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
8602 preferred size and location of the cropped image
8603
8604 -debug <events>
8605 enable debug printout
8606
8607 -define <key>{=<value>},...
8608 add coder/decoder specific options
8609
8610 -delay <1/100ths of a second>
8611 display the next image after pausing
8612
8613 -density <width>x<height>
8614 horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8615
8616 -depth <value>
8617 depth of the image
8618
8619 -descend
8620 obtain image by descending window hierarchy
8621
8622 -display <host:display[.screen]>
8623 specifies the X server to contact
8624
8625 -dispose <method>
8626 GIF disposal method
8627
8628 -dither
8629 apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
8630
8631 -encoding <type>
8632 specify the text encoding
8633
8634 -endian <type>
8635 specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
8636
8637 -frame include the X window frame in the imported image
8638
8639 -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
8640 Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
8641
8642 -help print usage instructions
8643
8644 -interlace <type>
8645 the type of interlacing scheme
8646
8647 -label <name>
8648 assign a label to an image
8649
8650 -limit <type> <value>
8651 Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height or Threads
8652 resource limit
8653
8654 -log <string>
8655 Specify format for debug log
8656
8657 -monitor
8658 show progress indication
8659
8660 -monochrome
8661 transform the image to black and white
8662
8663 -negate
8664 replace every pixel with its complementary color
8665
8666 -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
8667 size and location of an image canvas
8668
8669 -pause <seconds>
8670 pause between snapshots [import]
8671
8672 -ping efficiently determine image characteristics
8673
8674 -pointsize <value>
8675 pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
8676
8677 -quality <value>
8678 JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
8679
8680 -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8681 resize an image
8682
8683 -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
8684 rotate the image
8685
8686 -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8687 chroma subsampling factors
8688
8689 -scene <value>
8690 set scene number
8691
8692 -screen
8693 specify the screen to capture
8694
8695 -set <attribute> <value>
8696 set an image attribute
8697
8698 +set <attribute>
8699 unset an image attribute
8700
8701 -silent
8702 operate silently
8703
8704 -snaps <value>
8705 number of screen snapshots
8706
8707 -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8708 resize an image (quickly)
8709
8710 -transparent <color>
8711 make this color transparent within the image
8712
8713 -trim trim an image
8714
8715 -verbose
8716 print detailed information about the image
8717
8718 -version
8719 print GraphicsMagick version string
8720
8721 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options,
8722 above.
8723
8724
8726 Mogrify transforms an image or a sequence of images. These transforms
8727 include image scaling, image rotation, color reduction, and others.
8728 Each transmogrified image overwrites the corresponding original image,
8729 unless an option such as -format causes the output filename to be dif‐
8730 ferent from the input filename.
8731
8732 The graphics formats supported by mogrify are listed in GraphicsMag‐
8733 ick(1).
8734
8736 To convert all the TIFF files in a particular directory to JPEG, use:
8737
8738 gm mogrify -format jpeg *.tiff
8739
8740
8741 To convert a directory full of JPEG images to thumbnails, use:
8742
8743 gm mogrify -size 120x120 *.jpg -resize 120x120 +profile "*"
8744
8745
8746 In this example, '-size 120x120' gives a hint to the JPEG decoder that
8747 the images are going to be downscaled to 120x120, allowing it to run
8748 faster by avoiding returning full-resolution images to GraphicsMagick
8749 for the subsequent resizing operation. The ´-resize 120x120' specifies
8750 the desired dimensions of the output images. It will be scaled so its
8751 largest dimension is 120 pixels. The ´+profile "*"' removes any ICM,
8752 EXIF, IPTC, or other profiles that might be present in the input and
8753 aren't needed in the thumbnails.
8754
8755 To scale an image of a cockatoo to exactly 640 pixels in width and 480
8756 pixels in height, use:
8757
8758 gm mogrify -resize 640x480! cockatoo.miff
8759
8760
8762 Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
8763 the command line remains in effect for the set of images that follows,
8764 until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
8765
8766 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8767
8768
8769 -affine <matrix>
8770 drawing transform matrix
8771
8772 -antialias
8773 remove pixel aliasing
8774
8775 -asc-cdl <spec>
8776 apply ASC CDL color transform
8777
8778 -authenticate <string>
8779 decrypt image with this password
8780
8781 -auto-orient
8782 orient (rotate) image so it is upright
8783
8784 -background <color>
8785 the background color
8786
8787 -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
8788 pixels below the threshold become black
8789
8790 -blue-primary <x>,<y>
8791 blue chromaticity primary point
8792
8793 -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
8794 blur the image with a Gaussian operator
8795
8796 -border <width>x<height>
8797 surround the image with a border of color
8798
8799 -bordercolor <color>
8800 the border color
8801
8802 -channel <type>
8803 the type of channel
8804
8805 -charcoal <factor>
8806 simulate a charcoal drawing
8807
8808 -colorize <value>
8809 colorize the image with the pen color
8810
8811 -colors <value>
8812 preferred number of colors in the image
8813
8814 -colorspace <value>
8815 the type of colorspace
8816
8817 -comment <string>
8818 annotate an image with a comment
8819
8820 -compose <operator>
8821 the type of image composition
8822
8823 -compress <type>
8824 the type of image compression
8825
8826 -contrast
8827 enhance or reduce the image contrast
8828
8829 -convolve <kernel>
8830 convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
8831
8832 -create-directories
8833 create output directory if required
8834
8835 -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
8836 preferred size and location of the cropped image
8837
8838 -cycle <amount>
8839 displace image colormap by amount
8840
8841 -debug <events>
8842 enable debug printout
8843
8844 -define <key>{=<value>},...
8845 add coder/decoder specific options
8846
8847 -delay <1/100ths of a second>
8848 display the next image after pausing
8849
8850 -density <width>x<height>
8851 horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8852
8853 -depth <value>
8854 depth of the image
8855
8856 -despeckle
8857 reduce the speckles within an image
8858
8859 -display <host:display[.screen]>
8860 specifies the X server to contact
8861
8862 -dispose <method>
8863 GIF disposal method
8864
8865 -dither
8866 apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
8867
8868 -draw <string>
8869 annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
8870
8871 -edge <radius>
8872 detect edges within an image
8873
8874 -emboss <radius>
8875 emboss an image
8876
8877 -encoding <type>
8878 specify the text encoding
8879
8880 -endian <type>
8881 specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
8882
8883 -enhance
8884 apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
8885
8886 -equalize
8887 perform histogram equalization to the image
8888
8889 -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
8890 composite image on background color canvas image
8891
8892 -fill <color>
8893 color to use when filling a graphic primitive
8894
8895 -filter <type>
8896 use this type of filter when resizing an image
8897
8898 -flip create a "mirror image"
8899
8900 -flop create a "mirror image"
8901
8902 -font <name>
8903 use this font when annotating the image with text
8904
8905 -format <type>
8906 the image format type
8907
8908 -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
8909 surround the image with an ornamental border
8910
8911 -fuzz <distance>{%}
8912 colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
8913
8914 -gamma <value>
8915 level of gamma correction
8916
8917 -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
8918 blur the image with a Gaussian operator
8919
8920 -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
8921 Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
8922
8923 -gravity <type>
8924 direction primitive gravitates to when annotating the image.
8925
8926 -green-primary <x>,<y>
8927 green chromaticity primary point
8928
8929 -hald-clut <clut>
8930 apply a Hald CLUT to the image
8931
8932 -help print usage instructions
8933
8934 -implode <factor>
8935 implode image pixels about the center
8936
8937 -interlace <type>
8938 the type of interlacing scheme
8939
8940 -label <name>
8941 assign a label to an image
8942
8943 -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
8944 perform local adaptive thresholding
8945
8946 -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
8947 adjust the level of image contrast
8948
8949 -limit <type> <value>
8950 Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height or Threads
8951 resource limit
8952
8953 -linewidth
8954 the line width for subsequent draw operations
8955
8956 -list <type>
8957 the type of list
8958
8959 -log <string>
8960 Specify format for debug log
8961
8962 -loop <iterations>
8963 add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
8964
8965 -magnify
8966 magnify the image
8967
8968 -map <filename>
8969 choose a particular set of colors from this image
8970
8971 -mask <filename>
8972 Specify a clipping mask
8973
8974 -matte store matte channel if the image has one
8975
8976 -mattecolor <color>
8977 specify the color to be used with the -frame option
8978
8979 -median <radius>
8980 apply a median filter to the image
8981
8982 -minify <factor>
8983 minify the image
8984
8985 -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
8986 vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
8987
8988 -monitor
8989 show progress indication
8990
8991 -monochrome
8992 transform the image to black and white
8993
8994 -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
8995 Simulate motion blur
8996
8997 -negate
8998 replace every pixel with its complementary color
8999
9000 -noise <radius|type>
9001 add or reduce noise in an image
9002
9003 -noop NOOP (no option)
9004
9005 -normalize
9006 transform image to span the full range of color values
9007
9008 -opaque <color>
9009 change this color to the pen color within the image
9010
9011 -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
9012 apply a mathematical, bitwise, or value operator to an image
9013 channel
9014
9015 -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
9016 ordered dither the image
9017
9018 -output-directory <directory>
9019 output files to directory
9020
9021 -orient <orientation>
9022 Set the image orientation attribute
9023
9024 -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
9025 size and location of an image canvas
9026
9027 -paint <radius>
9028 simulate an oil painting
9029
9030 -pen <color>
9031 (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
9032
9033 -pointsize <value>
9034 pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
9035
9036 -profile <filename>
9037 add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile to image
9038
9039 -preserve-timestamp
9040 preserve the original timestamps of the file
9041
9042 -quality <value>
9043 JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
9044
9045 -raise <width>x<height>
9046 lighten or darken image edges
9047
9048 -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
9049 random threshold the image
9050
9051 -recolor <matrix>
9052 apply a color translation matrix to image channels
9053
9054 -red-primary <x>,<y>
9055 red chromaticity primary point
9056
9057 -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
9058 apply options to a portion of the image
9059
9060 -render
9061 render vector operations
9062
9063 -repage <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
9064 Adjust image page offsets
9065
9066 -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
9067 Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
9068
9069 -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9070 resize an image
9071
9072 -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
9073 roll an image vertically or horizontally
9074
9075 -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
9076 rotate the image
9077
9078 -sample <geometry>
9079 scale image using pixel sampling
9080
9081 -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
9082 chroma subsampling factors
9083
9084 -scale <geometry>
9085 scale the image.
9086
9087 -scene <value>
9088 set scene number
9089
9090 -set <attribute> <value>
9091 set an image attribute
9092
9093 +set <attribute>
9094 unset an image attribute
9095
9096 -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
9097 segment an image
9098
9099 -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
9100 shade the image using a distant light source
9101
9102 -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
9103 sharpen the image
9104
9105 -shave <width>x<height>{%}
9106 shave pixels from the image edges
9107
9108 -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
9109 shear the image along the X or Y axis
9110
9111 -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
9112 width and height of the image
9113
9114 -solarize <factor>
9115 negate all pixels above the threshold level
9116
9117 -spread <amount>
9118 displace image pixels by a random amount
9119
9120 -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
9121
9122 -stroke <color>
9123 color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
9124
9125 -strokewidth <value>
9126 set the stroke width
9127
9128 -swirl <degrees>
9129 swirl image pixels about the center
9130
9131 -texture <filename>
9132 name of texture to tile onto the image background
9133
9134 -threshold <value>{%}
9135 threshold the image
9136
9137 -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9138 resize an image (quickly)
9139
9140 -tile <filename>
9141 tile image when filling a graphic primitive
9142
9143 -transform
9144 transform the image
9145
9146 -transparent <color>
9147 make this color transparent within the image
9148
9149 -treedepth <value>
9150 tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
9151
9152 -trim trim an image
9153
9154 -type <type>
9155 the image type
9156
9157 -units <type>
9158 the units of image resolution
9159
9160 -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
9161 sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
9162
9163 -verbose
9164 print detailed information about the image
9165
9166 -version
9167 print GraphicsMagick version string
9168
9169 -view <string>
9170 FlashPix viewing parameters
9171
9172 -virtual-pixel <method>
9173 specify contents of "virtual pixels"
9174
9175 -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
9176 alter an image along a sine wave
9177
9178 -white-point <x>,<y>
9179 chromaticity white point
9180
9181 -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
9182 pixels above the threshold become white
9183
9184 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options,
9185 above.
9186
9187
9189 montage creates a composite image by combining several separate images.
9190 The images are tiled on the composite image with the name of the image
9191 optionally appearing just below the individual tile.
9192
9193 The composite image is constructed in the following manner. First, each
9194 image specified on the command line, except for the last, is scaled to
9195 fit the maximum tile size. The maximum tile size by default is 120x120.
9196 It can be modified with the -geometry command line argument or X
9197 resource. See Options for more information on command line arguments.
9198 See X(1) for more information on X resources. Note that the maximum
9199 tile size need not be a square.
9200
9201 Next the composite image is initialized with the color specified by the
9202 -background command line argument or X resource. The width and height
9203 of the composite image is determined by the title specified, the maxi‐
9204 mum tile size, the number of tiles per row, the tile border width and
9205 height, the image border width, and the label height. The number of
9206 tiles per row specifies how many images are to appear in each row of
9207 the composite image. The default is to have 5 tiles in each row and 4
9208 tiles in each column of the composite. A specific value is specified
9209 with -tile. The tile border width and height, and the image border
9210 width defaults to the value of the X resource -borderwidth. It can be
9211 changed with the -borderwidth or -geometry command line argument or X
9212 resource. The label height is determined by the font you specify with
9213 the -font command line argument or X resource. If you do not specify a
9214 font, a font is chosen that allows the name of the image to fit the
9215 maximum width of a tiled area. The label colors is determined by the
9216 -background and -fill command line argument or X resource. Note, that
9217 if the background and pen colors are the same, labels will not appear.
9218
9219 Initially, the composite image title is placed at the top if one is
9220 specified (refer to -fill). Next, each image is set onto the composite
9221 image, surrounded by its border color, with its name centered just
9222 below it. The individual images are left-justified within the width of
9223 the tiled area. The order of the images is the same as they appear on
9224 the command line unless the images have a scene keyword. If a scene
9225 number is specified in each image, then the images are tiled onto the
9226 composite in the order of their scene number. Finally, the last argu‐
9227 ment on the command line is the name assigned to the composite image.
9228 By default, the image is written in the MIFF format and can be viewed
9229 or printed with display(1).
9230
9231
9232 Note, that if the number of tiles exceeds the default number of 20 (5
9233 per row, 4 per column), more than one composite image is created. To
9234 ensure a single image is produced, use -tile to increase the number of
9235 tiles to meet or exceed the number of input images.
9236
9237 Finally, to create one or more empty spaces in the sequence of tiles,
9238 use the "NULL:" image format.
9239
9240 Note, a composite MIFF image displayed to an X server with display
9241 behaves differently than other images. You can think of the composite
9242 as a visual image directory. Choose a particular tile of the composite
9243 and press a button to display it. See display(1) and miff(5)
9244
9246 To create a montage of a cockatoo, a parrot, and a hummingbird and
9247 write it to a file called birds, use:
9248
9249 gm montage cockatoo.miff parrot.miff hummingbird.miff
9250 birds.miff
9251
9252
9253 To tile several bird images so that they are at most 256 pixels in
9254 width and 192 pixels in height, surrounded by a red border, and sepa‐
9255 rated by 10 pixels of background color, use:
9256
9257 gm montage -geometry 256x192+10+10 -bordercolor red
9258 birds.* montage.miff
9259
9260
9261 To create an unlabeled parrot image, 640 by 480 pixels, and surrounded
9262 by a border of black, use:
9263
9264 gm montage -geometry 640x480 -bordercolor black
9265 -label "" parrot.miff bird.miff
9266
9267
9268 To create an image of an eagle with a textured background, use:
9269
9270 gm montage -texture bumps.jpg eagle.jpg eagle.png
9271
9272
9273 To join several GIF images together without any extraneous graphics
9274 (e.g. no label, no shadowing, no surrounding tile frame), use:
9275
9276 gm montage +frame +shadow +label -tile 5x1
9277 -geometry 50x50+0+0 *.png joined.png
9278
9279
9281 Any option you specify on the command line remains in effect for the
9282 group of images following it, until the group is terminated by the
9283 appearance of any option or -noop. For example, to make a montage of
9284 three images, the first with 32 colors, the second with an unlimited
9285 number of colors, and the third with only 16 colors, use:
9286
9287
9288 gm montage -colors 32 cockatoo.1 -noop cockatoo.2
9289 -colors 16 cockatoo.3 cockatoos.miff
9290
9291
9292 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
9293
9294
9295 -adjoin
9296 join images into a single multi-image file
9297
9298 -affine <matrix>
9299 drawing transform matrix
9300
9301 -authenticate <string>
9302 decrypt image with this password
9303
9304 -background <color>
9305 the background color
9306
9307 -blue-primary <x>,<y>
9308 blue chromaticity primary point
9309
9310 -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
9311 blur the image with a Gaussian operator
9312
9313 -bordercolor <color>
9314 the border color
9315
9316 -borderwidth <geometry>
9317 the border width
9318
9319 -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
9320 remove pixels from the interior of an image
9321
9322 -colors <value>
9323 preferred number of colors in the image
9324
9325 -colorspace <value>
9326 the type of colorspace
9327
9328 -comment <string>
9329 annotate an image with a comment
9330
9331 -compose <operator>
9332 the type of image composition
9333
9334 -compress <type>
9335 the type of image compression
9336
9337 -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
9338 preferred size and location of the cropped image
9339
9340 -debug <events>
9341 enable debug printout
9342
9343 -define <key>{=<value>},...
9344 add coder/decoder specific options
9345
9346 -density <width>x<height>
9347 horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
9348
9349 -depth <value>
9350 depth of the image
9351
9352 -display <host:display[.screen]>
9353 specifies the X server to contact
9354
9355 -dispose <method>
9356 GIF disposal method
9357
9358 -dither
9359 apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
9360
9361 -draw <string>
9362 annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
9363
9364 -encoding <type>
9365 specify the text encoding
9366
9367 -endian <type>
9368 specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
9369
9370 -fill <color>
9371 color to use when filling a graphic primitive
9372
9373 -filter <type>
9374 use this type of filter when resizing an image
9375
9376 -font <name>
9377 use this font when annotating the image with text
9378
9379 -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
9380 surround the image with an ornamental border
9381
9382 -gamma <value>
9383 level of gamma correction
9384
9385 -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
9386 Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
9387
9388 -gravity <type>
9389 direction primitive gravitates to when annotating the image.
9390
9391 -green-primary <x>,<y>
9392 green chromaticity primary point
9393
9394 -help print usage instructions
9395
9396 -interlace <type>
9397 the type of interlacing scheme
9398
9399 -label <name>
9400 assign a label to an image
9401
9402 -limit <type> <value>
9403 Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height or Threads
9404 resource limit
9405
9406 -log <string>
9407 Specify format for debug log
9408
9409 -matte store matte channel if the image has one
9410
9411 -mattecolor <color>
9412 specify the color to be used with the -frame option
9413
9414 -mode <value>
9415 mode of operation
9416
9417 -monitor
9418 show progress indication
9419
9420 -monochrome
9421 transform the image to black and white
9422
9423 -noop NOOP (no option)
9424
9425 -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
9426 size and location of an image canvas
9427
9428 -pen <color>
9429 (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
9430
9431 -pointsize <value>
9432 pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
9433
9434 -quality <value>
9435 JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
9436
9437 -red-primary <x>,<y>
9438 red chromaticity primary point
9439
9440 -render
9441 render vector operations
9442
9443 -repage <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
9444 Adjust image page offsets
9445
9446 -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9447 resize an image
9448
9449 -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
9450 rotate the image
9451
9452 -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
9453 chroma subsampling factors
9454
9455 -scenes <value-value>
9456 range of image scene numbers to read
9457
9458 -shadow <radius>{x<sigma>}
9459 shadow the montage
9460
9461 -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
9462 sharpen the image
9463
9464 -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
9465 width and height of the image
9466
9467 -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
9468
9469 -stroke <color>
9470 color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
9471
9472 -strokewidth <value>
9473 set the stroke width
9474
9475 -texture <filename>
9476 name of texture to tile onto the image background
9477
9478 -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9479 resize an image (quickly)
9480
9481 -tile <geometry>
9482 layout of images [montage]
9483
9484 -title <string>
9485 assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
9486
9487 -transform
9488 transform the image
9489
9490 -transparent <color>
9491 make this color transparent within the image
9492
9493 -treedepth <value>
9494 tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
9495
9496 -trim trim an image
9497
9498 -type <type>
9499 the image type
9500
9501 -verbose
9502 print detailed information about the image
9503
9504 -version
9505 print GraphicsMagick version string
9506
9507 -white-point <x>,<y>
9508 chromaticity white point
9509
9510 For a more detailed description of each option, see Options,
9511 above.
9512
9513
9515 Montage options can appear on the command line or in your X resource
9516 file. Options on the command line supersede values specified in your X
9517 resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
9518
9519 All montage options have a corresponding X resource. In addition, mon‐
9520 tage uses the following X resources:
9521
9522 background (class Background)
9523 background color
9524
9525 Specifies the preferred color to use for the composite image
9526 background. The default is #ccc.
9527
9528 borderColor (class BorderColor)
9529 border color
9530
9531 Specifies the preferred color to use for the composite image
9532 border. The default is #ccc.
9533
9534 borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
9535 border width
9536
9537 Specifies the width in pixels of the composite image border. The
9538 default is 2.
9539
9540 font (class Font)
9541 font to use
9542
9543 Specifies the name of the preferred font to use when displaying
9544 text within the composite image. The default is 9x15, fixed, or
9545 5x8 determined by the composite image size.
9546
9547 matteColor (class MatteColor)
9548 color of the frame
9549
9550 Specify the color of an image frame. A 3D effect is achieved by
9551 using highlight and shadow colors derived from this color. The
9552 default value is #697B8F.
9553
9554 pen (class Pen)
9555 text color
9556
9557 Specifies the preferred color to use for text within the compos‐
9558 ite image. The default is black.
9559
9560 title (class Title)
9561 composite image title
9562
9563 This resource specifies the title to be placed at the top of the
9564 composite image. The default is not to place a title at the top
9565 of the composite image.
9566
9569 time executes an arbitrary gm utility command (e.g. convert) and
9570 reports the user and elapsed time. This provides way to measure com‐
9571 mand execution times similar to the Unix ´time' command but in a porta‐
9572 ble and consistent way.
9573
9575 To obtain time information for the execution of a command:
9576
9577 % gm time convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm convert input.ppm
9578 -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm 22.60s user 0.00s system 2354% cpu 0.960
9579 total
9580
9581 Here is the interpretation of the above output:
9582
9583 user - the total user time consumed.
9584 system - the total system time consumed.
9585 total - the total elapsed time consumed.
9586
9587
9589 The time command reqires no options other than the gm command to exe‐
9590 cute.
9591
9594 version displays the software release version, build quantum (pixel
9595 sample) depth, web site URL, copyright notice, enabled features sup‐
9596 port, configuration parameters, and final build options used to build
9597 the software. The available information depends on how the software
9598 was configured and the host system.
9599
9601 To display the version information:
9602
9603 GraphicsMagick 1.3.27a 2017-12-11 Q16 http://www.GraphicsMagick.org/
9604 Copyright (C) 2002-2020 GraphicsMagick Group.
9605 Additional copyrights and licenses apply to this software.
9606 See http://www.GraphicsMagick.org/www/Copyright.html for details.
9607 Feature Support:
9608 Native Thread Safe yes
9609 Large Files (> 32 bit) yes
9610 Large Memory (> 32 bit) yes
9611 BZIP yes
9612 DPS no
9613 FlashPix no
9614 FreeType yes
9615 Ghostscript (Library) no
9616 JBIG yes
9617 JPEG-2000 yes
9618 JPEG yes
9619 Little CMS yes
9620 Loadable Modules no
9621 OpenMP yes (201307)
9622 PNG yes
9623 TIFF yes
9624 TRIO no
9625 UMEM no
9626 WebP yes
9627 WMF yes
9628 X11 yes
9629 XML yes
9630 ZLIB yes
9631 Host type: x86_64-unknown-linux-gnu
9632 Configured using the command:
9633 ./configure ...
9634 Final Build Parameters:
9635 CC = ...
9636 CFLAGS = ...
9637 CPPFLAGS = ...
9638 CXX = ...
9639 CXXFLAGS = ...
9640 LDFLAGS = ...
9641 LIBS = ...
9642
9643
9645 The version command does not currently support any options.
9646
9647
9648
9649GraphicsMagick 2020/07/19 gm(1)